Nokia Solutions and Networks T6EK1 1X-EVDO SC480 BTS Microcell Base Station Transmtr User Manual print instructions

Nokia Solutions and Networks 1X-EVDO SC480 BTS Microcell Base Station Transmtr print instructions

User Manual 2 of 4

Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedJun 2004 4-671X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTConnecting Customer–DefinedInputs to the CBIOThe unit provides eight customer–defined inputs for connection toexternal contacts.  Each input (a signal/ground pair) is monitored for an“OPEN” (>50 k Ohms) or “CLOSED” (<3 Ohms) condition.RGPS or RF–GPS InstallationIf RGPS is being installed, proceed to Table 4-36. If RF–GPS is beinginstalled, proceed to Table 3-7.Cable PinoutFigure 4-42 shows the connector pins on cables C and C1. Table 4-35gives the pinout for cable C and C1.Figure 4-42: Connector Pins Numbering for Cables C and C11234567891011 12CONNECTOR FORCABLE CPIN 1CONNECTOR FORCABLE C1PIN 9Table 4-35: Pinout for Cables C and C1Cable C Wire Color Cable C1Pin Signal Pin9DC Ground 1 Blue–Black 151Power 1 Blue 88DC Ground 2 Yellow–Black 1410 Power 2 Yellow 74Transmit Port (–) Green–Black 95Transmit Port (+) Green 12Receive Port (–) White–Black 123Receive Port (+) White 47No Connect Red–Black No Connecttable continued on next page4
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20044-68Table 4-35: Pinout for Cables C and C1Cable C Cable C1Wire ColorPin PinSignal6No Connect Red No Connect12 PPS Timing (–) Brown–Black 1011 PPS Timing (+) Brown 2Wire colors are the same for both cables. Procedure to Install the RGPSHeadThe RGPS is connected to the BTS via the RGPS connector on theCBIO Board. See Figure 4-41.Site specific characteristics determine the GPS cabling that is installed.Install each cable by referring to the cabling diagram in Figure 4-41, andthe procedure in Table 4-36.  The lightning arrestor connections areshown in Figure 4-46.Figure 4-43 and Figure 4-44 show the RGPS head. Be sure to factor inmounting considerations as described in Chapter 3.The RGPS head must not make contact with any metalsurface other than the provided hardware. Use only theequipment provided to mount the RGPS head. Failure todo so could damage the RGPS head.CAUTIONTable 4-36: Procedure for Installing the RGPS Head and CablingStep Action1Determine the mounting location.2n WARNINGThe structure of the wall should be verified by a qualified structural engineer.Mounting the RGPS head and hardware to an inadequate wall structure and/or using inadequateinstallment methods can result in serious personal injury.Use the appropriate mounting bolts for the mounting surface and install the two wall mountingbrackets.  Refer to Figure 4-43.3Remove RF–GPS cover plate from CBIO Board.Remove protective connector cover.4Connect cables C and C1 into the punch block, as if they were part of the same cable, cut in themiddle maintaining color code and signal integrity. Connect the same corresponding color on bothsides of the punchblock (see Figure 4-41 and Table 4-35).4
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedJun 2004 4-691X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTTable 4-36: Procedure for Installing the RGPS Head and CablingStep Action5Connect RGPS cable (cable C1) to D–connector.Attach ferrite bead on the cable close to the BTS connector.6Route RGPS cable C (12–pin Deutsch connector) into the pipe.7Mate the 12–pin Deutsch connector of the RGPS Head cable and cable C.  Refer to Figure 4-43.Tighten the spinning flange on the connector a quarter turn to secure the connection.8Insert the pipe into the threaded mount in the RGPS Head and carefully hand–tighten.9Place the assembly into the mounting brackets.  Refer to Figure 4-43.  Tighten the U–bolt clampsto secure the assembly.Figure 4-43: Installing the Remote GPS HeadWALL MOUNTINGBRACKETS (2)CLAMP BRACKETS (2)U–BOLTSCABLE TO PUNCHBLOCK(CABLE C)REFER TO VIEW ARGPS HEAD WITH12 PIN MALECONNECTORMATINGCONNECTORSRGPS INTERFACECABLE WITH 12 PINFEMALE CONNECTORON ONE END ANDUNTERMINATED WIREON OTHER ENDVIEW ARGPS HEAD(MOTOROLA PARTNUMBER 0186012H03)1NOTE:1. REPLACEMENT RGPS HEAD(MOTOROLA PART NUMBER0186012H04)CABLE TO PUNCHBLOCK(CABLE C)4
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20044-70Figure 4-44: RGPS HeadTHREADED MOUNT ADAPTER12–PIN DEUTSCH TYPE MMPCONNECTORConnecting the RGPS Cable toLightning ArrestorFigure 4-45 is a detail of the RGPS connections. Figure 4-46 is a detailof the Lightning Arrestor connections. Figure 4-45: RGPS to SC480 Connection DiagramBlue/BlackBlueYellow/BlackYellowGreen/BlackGreenWhite/BlackWhiteRed/BlackRed Brown/BlackBrown1234567891011 12Earth GroundRGPS CABLE CONNECTOR(VIEWED FROM CABLE PERSPECTIVE)CCABLE DRAINLIGHTNING ARRESTOR(WNP CGDSO971017AA1OR EQUIVALENT)D–CONNECTORTO BTSCELL SITEGROUND =C1UNUSED 11410241278159RGPS HEAD (MOTOROLA P/N 0186012H04)4
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedJun 2004 4-711X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTBlue/BlackBlueYellow/BlackYellowGreen/BlackGreenWhite/BlackWhiteRed/BlackRedBrown/BlackBrownCable DrainBlue/BlackBlueYellow/BlackYellowGreen/BlackGreenWhite/BlackWhiteRed/BlackRedBrown/BlackBrownCable Drain+40VDC Lines +17VDC Lines +17VDC Lines+17VDC Equipment+17VDC Equipment+40VDC EquipmentC1 (RGPS)TO BTSUNITC (RGPS)TO RGPSRECEIVEREARTH GROUND MOUNTING PLATEBlue/BlackBlueYellow/BlackYellowGreen/BlackGreenWhite/BlackWhiteRed/BlackRedBrown/BlackBrown123456789101112Figure 4-46: RGPS Lightning Arrestor WiringConnecting the RF–GPS CableFigure 4-47 shows the components of the RF–GPS. The RF–GPS isconnected to the BTS via the RF–GPS module through the RGPSconnector on the CBIO Board. See Figure 4-48.ProcedureUse the procedure in Table 4-37 to install the RF–GPS system.Table 4-37: Procedure for Installing RF–GPS Antenna and CablingStep Action1Determine the mounting location (see RF–GPS Mounting Considerations, Table 6-34).2Install the mounting kit at the RF–GPS location of choice. Use the appropriate mounting bolts formounting surface.3n WARNINGThe roof structure on which the mounting pole is attached should be verified by a qualified structuralengineer for the weight of the RF–GPS engine and mounting hardware or under adverse conditions forthe installation areaMounting the RF–GPS antenna and hardware to an inadequate roof surface and/or using inadequateinstallation methods can result in serious injury.4Attach the RF–GPS head assembly to the post mounting assembly and secure the assembly to theassembly to the mounting kit using the screws and nuts supplied (see Figure 4-47).4
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20044-72Table 4-37: Procedure for Installing RF–GPS Antenna and CablingStep Action5Attach the grounding kit to the mounting pole.6Connect one (1) N connector of the 50–feet superflex cable to the N jack of the RF–GPS antenna cableand route the other end of the cable down to the frame.7If not already done, attach RF–GPS Module to CBIO Board and secure using 4 M4 screws.8Route the cable to the RF–GPS connector at the rear of the BTS.9Connect cable to RF–GPS connector. See Figure 4-48.4
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedJun 2004 4-731X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTFW00410R4–IN3/4–IN3–IN2”ANTENNA/PREAMP(CGDSANT62301)CABLE ASSEMBLY(N–DSK) (12–IN LONG)RUBBER BOOT(CGDSANT62301)1/2–IN SCREWSMOUNTING SHROUD(CGDSMNT62311)OUTER GASKET(CGDSMNT62311)POSTMOUNTINGASSEMBLY(CGDS62312)CABLE RETAINING NUT(CGDSMNT62311)“N” JACK(CGDSMCXNJACK)(SEE NOTE 1)ADJUSTABLE FROM33.5 TO 47–IN“N”  JACKCONNECTORMOUNTING &GROUNDING KIT(CGDS2417071)(FSJ4–50B) TO BTSROOFNOTE:1. TOTAL WEIGHT FOR GPS ANTENNAASSEMBLY – 0.65 LBS.REF TO(CGDSMCXNJACK)E/KK(CGDSVXL550)Figure 4-47: RF–GPS Installation and Components4
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20044-74ti–cdma–wp–00311–v01–ildoc–ahDAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUTSDCX KIT NO.SDCX SERIAL NO.DAISY–CHAIN POWERSDCX POWEREXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUTRF–GPD INPWRJDCustomer I/OFigure 4-48: Span and RF–GPS Cabling DetailsConnecting MCC–DOAt the front of the BTS under the CCP2 Shelf, there are two ethernetconnectors for MCC–DO use: Single and Dual. The connections can bemade with standard ethernet cables. The MCC–DO card provides forthree MCC–DO span lines (See Figure 4-49).  Refer to 1X EV–DOHardware Installation manual  – 68P09257A95 for further information.4
Span Line, RGPS, and RF–GPS Cabling – continuedJun 2004 4-751X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTti–cdma–wp–00326–v01–ildoc–ahFigure 4-49: EV–DO Connections19MHz EVEN RESET ALARM MMIPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMRESETGLIACTIVEACTIVEACTIVEBPR A BPR B AUXMMIMMIGROUP 1 SPANDUAL SINGLE LAN A LAN BSPARESYSTEMSTATUSENET ENETACTTATSINGLEDUALGRP1SPAN GRP2SPAN GRP3SPANEthernet ConnectionsMCC–DO Span LineConnectionsNOTE:MCC–DO card occupies MCCslots 1 & 2.4
Customer Input / Output CablesDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20044-76IntroductionThe objective of this procedure is to attach the ferrite core onto thecustomer input and output cables.Cable Descriptions and PartNumbersTable 4-38 gives the cable descriptions and part numbers used to installthe Customer I/O connectors.Table 4-38: Cable Descriptions and Part NumbersCable Qty. Part Number DescriptionE 1 CustomerSupplied Customer Input/Output cable, 0–8 conductor, 18–24 AWG, strandedwire4Molex, terminalplugs, P/N39352–0106Connector, 6 pin2Molex, terminalplugs, P/N39352–0108Connector, 8 pin3Motorola P/N7687717T02 Core, Ferrite1–3 CustomerSupplied Tie–wrap Customer Input and OutputConnector PinoutsInput PinoutsTable 4-39 lists the pinouts for the Customer Input connectors.Table 4-39: Customer Input Connector PinoutsPin Number Description1Customer Input 1/52Customer Input 1/5 Return3Customer Input 2/64Customer Input 2/6 Return5Customer Input 3/76Customer Input 3/7 Returntable continued on next page4
Site Cleanup – continuedJun 2004 4-771X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTTable 4-39: Customer Input Connector PinoutsPin Number Description7Customer Input 4/88Customer Input 4/8 Return Output PinoutsTable 4-40 lists the pinouts for the Customer Output connectors.Table 4-40: Customer Input Connector PinoutsPin Number Description1Customer Output 1/3/5/7  NC2Customer Output 1/3/5/7  C3Customer Output 1/3/5/7  NO4Customer Output 2/4/6/8  NC5Customer Output 2/4/6/8  C6Customer Output 2/4/6/8  NO ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 4-41 to attach a ferrite core.Table 4-41: Procedure for Using Ferrite Core on Customer Input and Output WiresStep Action1Route Customer I/O cables from termination equipment to rear of BTS and connect.2At the rear of the BTS, just below the top, are three pairs of connectors for customer defined inputsand outputs. See Figure 4-48.3Connect the cable for Customer Outputs 1 and 2 to BTS connector  CUST. OUTPUT 1–2.Perform the same for the remaining connectors.4After connections are made, bundle the wires of CUST. OUTPUT 1–2 and CUST. OUTPUT 3–4together and place a ferrite core around them.  Ensure that the wires will not be pinched prior toclosing and latching the ferrite core.5Slide ferrite core as close to the BTS connectors as possible without causing stress.  Use a tie–wrap onthe ferrite core side away from the BTS connectors to hold the ferrite core in place.6Perform step 4 and step 5 for  CUST. OUTPUT 5–6 and CUST. OUTPUT 7–8 and CUST. INPUT1–4 and CUST. INPUT 5–8.  4
Site CleanupDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20044-78Remove Protective CoveringRemove any anti–static plastic or cloth sheeting that was used to coverthe equipment.Lighting FixturesRemove the masking tape from the fluorescent light fixtures.ToolsPlace all hand and power tools in the installation tool kit or otherappropriate place. Note any tools that need replacement, cleaning, oradjustment.MaterialsPlace any leftover materials in a location specified by the site manager.Remove DebrisRemove any packing material.Ensure that all scrap materials have been removed from any tables orstands.Clean/sweep the area. Ensure that all alignment marks have beenremoved.EnvironmentRemove any temporary weather protection used for installation.Check that the power connections are tight.Organize any items (manuals, materials, etc.) left on site and place themin a location specified by the site manager.Check that the unit lock is secure and key is removed.Verify that cabling is properly secured between unit and enclosures.4
Installation Completion ChecklistJun 2004 4-791X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTDirectionsFill out the installation completion checklist and make any necessarycopies. You may copy this check sheet as needed.Indoor Installation CompletionChecklistDate Hardware Installation Completed: ________________________Site:_______________________________________________________Serial Number(s):__________________________ __________________________________________________________Checklist Completed By:_____________________________________Checklist Reviewed By:______________________________________Table 4-42: Indoor Installation Completion ChecklistStatus No. Item Notes1Equipment is not damaged.2Air flow clearance requirements are met.3Mounting plate is level and secure. (Indoor)4BTS is securely mounted to plate and rack.(Indoor)5TME is securely mounted to wall or pole.(Outdoor)6PDM is installed and cabled within TME.(Outdoor)7BTS is securely mounted within the TME.(Outdoor)8BTS is correctly cabled to TME.91U Module is installed and cabled to TME (Ifused).10 HMS is securely mounted to TME. (Outdoor)11 HMS is cabled to TME. (Outdoor)12 PDE is securely mounted to wall or pole.(outdoor)13 HX is securely mounted to PDE. (Outdoor)14 HX is cabled to PDE. (Outdoor)15 TME, PDE, and cCLPA are grounded.(Outdoor)table continued next page4
Installation Completion Checklist – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20044-80Table 4-42: Indoor Installation Completion ChecklistStatus NotesItemNo.16 TME is cabled to PDE and cCLPA throughconduit and conduit hubs on TME are tight.17 PDE is cabled to TME through conduit andconduit hubs on PDE are tight.18 cCLPA is cable to TME through conduit andand conduit hubs on cCLPA are tight.19 Conduit is sufficiently grounded.20 200–240 VAC is connected to PDE.21 Battery backups (if used) are connected to thePDE.22 TME DC power cable is connected (throughconduit) to PDE (Outdoor)23 cCLPA DC power cable is connected throughconduit) to PDE24 RGPS head and mast are secure.25 RGPS head has a clear view of the sky and isnot in a location which accumulates debris.Make sure the RGPS is located away fromthe BTS transmit antenna.26 Local GPS antenna is secure. (If used)27 Local GPS cabling is installed (If used).28 Mounting rack is isolated from the Masterground. (Indoor)29 cCLPA is securely mounted to rack (if inuse).  (Indoor)30 Compact BTS connection to the DC source issecure. (Indoor)31 cCLPA connection to its DC source is secure.(Indoor)32 The antenna connections are secure.33 The antenna cables are protected by lightningarrestors (if applicable).34 Span and RGPS connections are protected bylightning arrestors (if applicable).35 The RGPS ground lead is connected to theBTS digital ground reference.table continued next page4
Installation Completion Checklist – continuedJun 2004 4-811X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTTable 4-42: Indoor Installation Completion ChecklistStatus NotesItemNo.36 Installation hardware is removed.37 The earth ground connections are securebetween the earth ground and the CompactBTS. (Indoor)38 The DC input cable is securely attached to theDC input connector.  (Indoor)39 The BTS–to–cCLPA cabling is secure (ifapplicable)   (Indoor)40 cCLPA connection to earth ground is secure(if cCLPA in use).  (Indoor)41 The antenna N–type connectors are securelyattached to the antenna A and B connectors(if applicable). (Indoor)42 All unused ports on BTS and/or cCLPA areproperly terminated.  (Indoor)43 All cables are dressed and tied. (Indoor)44 Power, Span, Customer I/O, PA,  RGPS, andDO cables to the BTS have a ferrite coreattached and tie–wrapped in place.45 The external power source (DC) is active.(Indoor)46 AC power source is active. (Outdoor)47 The circuit breaker on the BTS is disengaged(Pulled out).48 Circuit breakers are disengaged (Pulled out)on TME PDM. (Outdoor)49 Circuit breakers are disengaged (Pulled out)on PDE. (Outdoor)50 Circuit breaker is disengaged (Pulled out) oncCLPA.51 The site is cleaned, swept and trash removed.52 The site specific documentation is present atthe site. 4
Installation Completion Checklist – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20044-82Notes4
Jun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTChapter 5: Power InstallationTable of ContentsFrame Configuration DIP Switch 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Frame Configuration DIP Switch 5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion Frame DIP Switch Settings 5-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion 1 Frame DIP Switch 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion 2 Frame DIP Switch 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expansion 3 Frame DIP Switch 5-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre–Power Up Test (Indoor) 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objective 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power for EV–DO 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC Power Pre–Test 5-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cCLPA DC Power Pre–Test 5-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration) 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objective 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection 5-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Backup DC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration) 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objective 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Descriptions and Part Numbers 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Required 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabling Inspection 5-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power–Up Test 5-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Power–Up Tests 5-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor Configuration Initial Power Test 5-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remove Power 5-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing BTS Power 5-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing cCLPA Power 5-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing PDE Power 5-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Table of Contents  – continued1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTNotes5
Frame Configuration DIP SwitchJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  5-1DRAFTIntroductionThis section describes setting the DIP switch positions for starter/singleframe and exapansion frames. The following sections describe BTSpreparation before applying DC power.Setting Frame ConfigurationDIP SwitchThe frame configuration switch is located on the Compact BTSInput/Output (CBIO) Card of the BTS. Figure 5-1 shows the switchposition for a starter /single frame configuration.  If there are expansionframes, then each would have the DIP switch positions set to reflect thatframes identification. See Figure 5-2.The switch settings must be verified and set before power is applied tothe BTS. Refer to Figure 5-1 or Table 5-1 for a starter or single frame.Figure 5-1: DIP Switch ConfigurationFrame ID3rd and 4th Positions– Don’t Care1       2      3       4DNNote: Black represents Switch ActuatorUPDAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUTSDCXKIT NO.SDCXSERIAL NO.DAISY–CHAINPOWERSDCX POWEREXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUTRF–GPS INPWR5
Frame Configuration DIP Switch  – continued 5-2 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 5-1: Frame ID Switch Position – Single/Starter Frame1 2 3 4UP UP –– –––– = Don’t Care. These switch positions do not affect the BTS. Expansion Frame DIP SwitchSettingsFigure 5-2 shows the switch position for the expansion frames.Figure 5-2: Expansion Frames DIP Switch ConfigurationExpansion 13rd and 4th Positions– Don’t Care1       2      3       4DNNote: Black represents Switch ActuatorUPExpansion 21       2      3       4DNUPExpansion 31       2      3       4DNUPDAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUTSDCXKIT NO.SDCXSERIAL NO.DAISY–CHAINPOWERSDCX POWEREXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUTRF–GPS INPWR5
Frame Configuration DIP Switch  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  5-3DRAFTExpansion 1 Frame DIP SwitchThe switch settings must be verified and set before power is applied tothe BTS. Refer to Figure 5-2 or Table 5-2 for the expansion 1 frame.Table 5-2: Frame ID Switch Position – Expansion 1 Frame1 2 3 4DN UP –– –––– = Don’t Care. These switch positions do not affect the BTS. Expansion 2 Frame DIP SwitchThe switch settings must be verified and set before power is applied tothe BTS. Refer to Figure 5-2 or  Table 5-3 for Expansion 2 frame.Table 5-3: Frame ID Switch Position – Expansion 2 Frame1 2 3 4UP DN –– –––– = Don’t Care. These switch positions do not affect the BTS. Expansion 3 Frame DIP SwitchThe switch settings must be verified and set before power is applied tothe BTS. Refer to Figure 5-2 or  Table 5-4 for Expansion 3 frame.Table 5-4: Frame ID Switch Position – Expansion 3 Frame1 2 3 4DN DN –– –––– = Don’t Care. These switch positions do not affect the BTS. 5
Pre–Power Up Test (Indoor) 5-4 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTObjectiveThis procedure check for any electrical problems and verifies theoperation and tolerances of the cell site BTS power supply prior toapplying power for the first time.Power for EV–DOInformation for applying power to a BTS equipped with EV–DO(MCC–DO) can be found in 1xEV–DO Hardware Installation manual –68P09257A95Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required to perform the Pre–Power Uptest:SDigital Multimeter (DMM)Before handling any circuit cards or modules, be sure towear a grounding strap to prevent damage from ESD.CAUTIONCabling InspectionUsing the site specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SDC Power cablingSReceive RF cablingSTransmit RF cablingSGPSDC Power Pre–TestPerform the procedure Table 5-5 in before applying any power to theBTS.Table 5-5: BTS DC Pre–Power TestStep Action* IMPORTANTWhen handling circuit boards and modules, be sure to wear a grounding strap to prevent damagescaused by ESD.1Remove front panel cover.2Unseat all circuit boards and modules, but do not remove them from their slots. table continued on next page5
Pre–Power Up Test (Indoor)  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  5-5DRAFTTable 5-5: BTS DC Pre–Power TestStep Action3At the rear of the BTS, verify that 20 or 25 A circuit breaker is OFF (pulled out). See Figure 5-3 orFigure 1-8.4Use a DMM (set to ohms) and verify the resistance on the +27V bus.– Remove the Power Supply Module from the CCP2 Shelf– Verify that the resistance from the power (+) feed terminal  with respect to ground measures > 500W  See Figure 5-3– Verify that the resistance from the power (–) feed terminal  with respect to ground measures > 500W   See Figure 5-3– The resistance measurement should not read 0 (zero).5Re–seat all circuit boards into their slots6Install the Power Supply Module into its slot.7Install front panel cover.    GROUND Location(Screw Holes)  DC PowerTerminal Strip Circuit Breaker 25AFigure 5-3: Location of Circuit Breaker 25cCLPA DC Power Pre–TestPerform the procedure Table 5-6 in before applying any power to thecCLPA.5
Pre–Power Up Test (Indoor)  – continued 5-6 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 5-6: cCLPA DC Pre–Power TestStep Action1Ensure that DC power is disengaged at the source. Verify that the DC power cable has been connectedusing the procedure in Table 4-8.2Remove I/O panel cover.3At the bottom of the cCLPA, verify that 25 A circuit breaker to OFF (pulled out). See Figure 5-4.4Us a DMM (set to ohms) and verify the resistance on the +27 V bus.– Verify that the resistance from the power (+) feed terminal  with respect to ground measures > 500W – Verify that the resistance from the power (–) feed terminal  with respect to ground measures > 500W   The resistance measurement should not read 0 (zero).5Proceed to Initial Power up procedure in Table 5-11.  ti–cdma–wp–00298–v01–ildoc–ahFigure 5-4: Bottom View of cCLPA25A FUSEfor +27 V5
AC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration)Jun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  5-7DRAFTObjectiveThe objective of this procedure is to verify the AC power for theCompact BTS outdoor configuration.Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required to perform the Pre–Power Uptest:SDigital Multimeter (DMM) or equivalentCabling InspectionUsing the site specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SAC Power cablingSDC Power CablingAC power was installed per manufacturer’s installation procedure.Perform the procedure Table 5-7 in before applying any power to theTME and cCLPA.Table 5-7: PDE Initial Power –Up TestStep Action* IMPORTANTTo avoid extensive re–work of the PDE and BTS connections, this procedure should be performedafter the PDE and TME are mounted in place.n WARNINGThis equipment uses dangerous voltages and is capable of causing death. Failure to observe thisWarning could result in electrical shock to personnel and damage to equipment. The AC voltagesource should be isolated and locked, and a clearly visible, Warning label attached.1Verify that AC power from the source is OFF.2If not already done, remove safety shield covering AC terminal block.3Connect AC power cable to AC power source.4Verify that PDE DC circuit breakers are set to “O” or pulled out (disengaged).5Verify that AC power cable is securely connected to PDE AC terminal block.6Turn on AC power source.n WARNINGThis equipment uses dangerous voltages and is capable of causing death. Failure to observe thisWarning could result in electrical shock to personnel and damage to equipment. Do not wear jewelryon hands/fingers when making electrical measurements. table continued on next page5
AC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration)  – continued 5-8 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 5-7: PDE Initial Power –Up TestStep Action7Using a DMM set toVAC, measure the voltage at the AC terminal block. DMM should indicate200–240 VAC.  Adjust AC voltage as necessary.8Remove DMM.9If there is nothing further to do, replace safety shield. Secure to cabinet with 2 nuts and washers. Usean adjustable wrench to tighten nuts. Torque nuts to 3.4 N–M (20 in–lbs).  5
Battery Backup DC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration)Jun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  5-9DRAFTObjectiveThe objective of this procedure is to verify the Battery Backup DCpower for the Compact BTS outdoor configuration.Cable Descriptions and PartNumbersTable 5-8 gives the cable description and part number for therecommended cable. Consult manufacturer’s installation guide forfurther information.Table 5-8: Cable Descriptions and Part NumbersCable Qty. Part Number Description{L 1 CustomerSupplied DC power cables, 10 AWG, stranded, designed for  +20 to +34 VDCpower input{ Length of cables are dependent upon BTS equipment layout. Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required to perform the Pre–Power Uptest:SDigital Multimeter (DMM) or equivalentTools RequiredRelatively small, flat head, screwdriver or equivalent.Cabling InspectionUsing the site specific documentation generated by Motorola SystemsEngineering, verify that the following cable systems are properlyconnected:SAC Power cablingSDC Power CablingBattery Backup has been installed per the manufacturer’s installationprocedure.Following the procedure in Table 5-9 to verify Battery Backup DCpower is present.Table 5-9: Procedure to Verify Battery Backup DC Power TestStep Actionn WARNINGDo not wear a grounding device or metal of any kind on hands/fingers when working with voltage.injury to personnel and damage to equipment could occur.1Verify that Battery Backup DC Power is disengaged. table continued on next page5
Battery Backup DC Power Input (Outdoor Configuration)  – continued 5-10 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 5-9: Procedure to Verify Battery Backup DC Power TestStep Action2If not already done, connect Battery Backup DC power cable to batteries.3If not already done, remove safety shield covering DC terminal block.4Verify that Battery Backup DC power cable is securely connected to DC terminal block of PDE.5Verify that circuit breakers on PDE front panel are disengaged (pulled out or set to “O” (OFF)).6Turn on Battery Backup source.7Using a DMM set to VDC, measure the voltage at the DC terminal block. DMM indicates VDC in therange +20 to +34 VDC.8Remove DMM.9If there is nothing further to do, replace safety shield. Secure to cabinet with 2 nuts and washers. Usean adjustable wrench to tighten nuts. Torque nuts to 3.4 N–M (20 in–lbs).  5
Initial Power–Up TestJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  5-11DRAFTInitial Power–Up TestsPotentially lethal voltage and current levels are present inthe Compact BTS. This test must NOT be performedwithout a second person present capable of administeringemergency medical treatment. Remove all decorative metalbefore beginning this test. Do NOT wear a grounding strapwhen performing voltage measurements.WARNINGBTS Initial Power–UpPerform the procedure in Table 5-10 to verify input power. Once powerhas been applied the cards and modules within the BTS  should beginoperating within specifications.Table 5-10: Procedure for BTS Initial Power–UpStep ActionNOTEIf the BTS is being utilized in an outdoor configuration, perform this procedure after the TME hasbeen verified as operational.1Ensure that DC power source is OFF.2Connect DC power to BTS DC Power input.3Turn on DC power source.4Use a DMM (set to VDC) to verify the +27 V power output is within +20 to +34 VDC)5On the BTS, set the 25 A circuit breaker to ON (push in). See Figure 5-3.6If not already done, install the fan module, note that the fan module begins operating. Feel for airmovement at the exhaust vent on top of the BTS.7Ensure that all circuit boards and modules are seated and locked into their associated slots.  cCLPA Initial Power –UpPerform the procedure in Table 5-11 to perform the initial power–up.Table 5-11: Procedure cCLPA Initial Power–UpStep ActionNOTEIf the cCLPA is being utilized in an outdoor configuration, perform this procedure after the PDE hasbeen verified as operational.1Ensure that DC power source is OFF. table continued on next page5
Initial Power–Up Test  – continued 5-12 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 5-11: Procedure cCLPA Initial Power–UpStep Action2  If not already done, remove cCLPA I/O panel cover.3Connect DC power to cCLPA I/O board DC terminal block.4Turn on DC power source.5Using a DMM (set to VDC),  measure the voltage at the cCLPA I/O board terminal block.DC voltage should measure in the range of +20 to +34 VDC. Adjust DC power source as necessary.6Remove DMM and install I/O panel cover.7On the cCLPA, push in 20 A circuit breaker.  Outdoor Configuration InitialPower TestTME Initial Power–UpPerform the procedure Table 5-12 in before applying any power to theBTS and HMS.Table 5-12: TME DC Initial Power–Up TestStep Action* IMPORTANTTo avoid extensive re–work of the TME and BTS connections, this procedure should be performedafter the TME with BTS is mounted in place.NOTEPerform this procedure after the PDE has been verified as operational.1Verify that DC power from the PDE is OFF.2If not already done, route DC power cable from PDE through conduit to TME.3If not already done, remove protective cover from voltage connection on PDA.4Use a Phillips screw driver to remove screws from DC power connector on PDA.5Set lug of  “–” wire in the RTN location and secure with screw.6Set lug of “+” wire in the  +27 VDC location and secure with screw.7Verify that 1U and TME circuit breakers on PDA are disengaged (pulled out).8Turn on PDE supplying the TME.9Using a DMM set to VDC, measure the voltage at the PDA connector. DMM should indicate +20 to+34 VDC.10 If not already done, connect PDA to HMS Controller (D–connector) table continued on next page5
Initial Power–Up Test  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  5-13DRAFTTable 5-12: TME DC Initial Power–Up TestStep Action11 If not already done, connect PDA to BTS. (Three appropriately marked cables .)12 Engage (push in) TME circuit breaker on PDA.NOTEFans on HMS and BTS begin to operate. With TME cable connected the controller for the HMS andBTS is bypassed, and DC power is supplied as long as the TME circuit breaker is engaged.13 Using a DMM set to VDC, measure the voltage at the BTS DC Input connector. DMM should indicate+20 to +34 VDC.14 Using a DMM set to VDC, measure the voltage at the HMS Controller connector. DMM shouldindicate +20 to +34 VDC.15 If the 1U connector is being used, engage 1U circuit breaker (push in), use a DMM set to VDC tomeasure the voltage at the 1U unit connector. DMM should indicate +20 to +34 VDC.NOTEIf 1U connector is not in use, do not measure at this time.   5
Remove Power 5-14 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTRemoving BTS PowerPerform the procedure in Table 5-13, if power must be removed from theBTS.Table 5-13: Procedure to Remove Power to BTSStep Action1For indoor configuration, set the 25 A circuit breaker to OFF (pulled out). See Figure 5-3.For outdoor configuration, open TME and set circuit breaker on PDA to “O”.Set TME circuit breaker on PDE to OFF.2Confirm all LEDs are OFF.3If possible, for added safety, locate circuit breaker of DC power source (PDE or Battery Backup) andset it to OFF.  Removing cCLPA PowerPerform the procedure in Table 5-14, if power must be removed from thecCLPA.Table 5-14: Procedure to Remove Power to cCLPAStep Action1Set the 20A circuit breaker to OFF (pulled out). See Figure 5-4.2For indoor configuration, turn off DC power source.For outdoor configuration, pull cCLPA circuit breaker on PDE out.3Turn off Battery backup DC power (if used).  Removing PDE PowerPerform the procedure in Table 5-15, if power must be removed from thePDE.Table 5-15: Procedure to Remove Power to PDEStep Action1Turn off AC power source.2Turn off Battery Backup DC power (if used).  5
Jun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTChapter 6: Optimization and CalibrationTable of ContentsPreliminary Operations: Overview 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cicruit Backhaul Operation 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packet Backhaul Operation 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell–site Types 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF/NECF 6-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Installation of Boards/Modules 6-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet LAN 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ethernet LAN Termination 6-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Optimization and Calibration 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Process Summary 6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell-site Types 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CDF/NECF 6-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS System Software Download 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Equipage Verification 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the LMF 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Packet BTS files 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinLMF Features and Installation Requirements 6-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinLMF File Structure Overview 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinLMF Home Directory 6-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NECF Filename Conventions and Directory Location 6-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinLMF Operating System Installation 6-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy BTS CDF (or NECF) and CBSC CDF Files to the WinLMF Computer 6-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Named HyperTerminal Connection for MMI Communication 6-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Lines – Interface and Isolation 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Interface 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolate BTS from T1/E1 Spans 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1/E1 Span Isolation 6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LMF to BTS Connection 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect the WinLMF to the BTS 6-17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the LMF 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic LMF Operation 6-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table of Contents  – continued1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTThe LMF Display and the BTS 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphical User Interface Overview 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding GUI Operation 6-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command Line Interface Overview 6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Into a BTS 6-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logging Out 6-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishing an MMI Communication Session 6-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Online Help 6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors 6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the BTS 6-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pinging the Processors 6-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download the BTS 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ROM Code 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RAM Code 6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verify GLI ROM Code Loads 6-38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to GLI 6-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI Devices 6-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting CSA Clock Source and Enabling CSAs 6-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enable MCCs 6-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification 6-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Synchronization and Alarm (CSA) Sub–system Description 6-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Panel LEDs 6-43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Stability Oscillator / Medium Stability Oscillator (HSO/MSO) 6-44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSA Frequency Verification 6-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup (GPS & HSO/MSO Verification) 6-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS Initialization/Verification 6-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup 6-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Test Equipment to the BTS 6-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Test Equipment 6-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Warm-up 6-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Set Calibration 6-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 6-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Procedures Included 6-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPIB Addresses 6-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Test Equipment 6-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manually Selecting Test Equipment in a Serial Connection Tab 6-67 . . . . . Automatically Selecting Test Equipment in the Serial Connection Tab 6-68 Calibrating Test Equipment 6-68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Cables Overview 6-69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrating Test Cable Configurations with a  Communications System Analyzer6-70 Calibrate Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer 6-71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table of Contents  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTSetting Cable Loss Values 6-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting TX and RX Directional  Coupler Loss Value 6-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bay Level Offset Calibration 6-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Bay Level Offset Calibration 6-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is BLO Calibration? 6-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Verification During Calibration 6-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to Calibrate BLOs 6-76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLO Calibration Data File 6-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BLO for Expansion BTS 6-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment Setup for RF Path Calibration 6-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (TX) Path Calibration Description 6-79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Calibration and the LMF 6-80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set-up for TX Calibration 6-81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Calibration 6-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Cal/Audit and TX Calibration  Procedure 6-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Download BLO Procedure 6-84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration Audit Introduction 6-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Path Audit 6-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Audit Test 6-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create CAL File 6-87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Table of Contents  – continued1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTNotes6
Preliminary Operations: OverviewJUN 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT6-1IntroductionThis section first verifies proper frame equipage against the site-specificdocumentation supplied for each BTS application.Cicruit Backhaul OperationIf circuit backhaul operation is being used, perform the proceduresdescribed in this chapter. Refer to the LMF Help, if further informationis needed.Packet Backhaul OperationIf packet backhaul configuration is being used, perform the proceduresdescribed in Appendix I.Peform the IBR procedures described in Appendix G and Appendix H ifGLI3 data load and span parameters need to be verified.Cell–site TypesThe site is configured as Omni with one carrier. The BTS can handle twocarriers.CDF/NECFThe Configuration Data File (CDF) or Network Element ConfigurationFile (NECF) contains information that defines the BTS and data used todownload files to the devices. The BTS CDF (bts–#.cdf) and CBSCCDF (cbsc–#.cdf) files are used by circuit BTSs. The NEC Base(NECB – NECB*bts#.xml ) and NEC Journaling (NECJ–NECJ*bts#.xml ) files are used by packet BTSs. CDF or NEC filesmust be placed in the applicable BTS folder before the LMF can be usedto log into that BTS. CDF and NEC files are normally obtained from theCBSC using a floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can beused if the LMF computer has that capability.The CDF and NEC files include the following information:SDownload instructions and protocolSSite specific equipage informationSCCP2 Shelf allocation plan– BBX equipage– CSA equipage– MCC–1X (16, 24,32, 64) channel element allocation plan. This planindicates how the CCP2 shelf is configured, and how paging,synchronization, traffic, and access channel elements (andassociated gain values) are assigned among the (up to 3) MCC–1Xsin the shelf.SCSA equipage6
Preliminary Operations: OverviewJUN 20041X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT6-2SEffective Rate Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennasrespectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of atransmit antenna based on the site geography, antenna placement, andgovernment regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, theantenna gain, (dependent on the units of measurement specified) andantenna feed line loss can be combined to determine the requiredpower of the BTS. The corresponding BBX–1X output level requiredto achieve that power level on any channel/sector can also bedetermined.Refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation foradditional information on the layout of the LMF directorystructure (including CDF or NEC file locations andformats).NOTESite Equipage VerificationReview the site documentation. Match the site engineering equipage datato the actual boards and modules shipped to the site. Physically inspectand verify the equipment provided for the frame.Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card/module to prevent damage byESD. After removal, the card/module should be placed ona conductive surface or back into the anti–static packagingin which it was shipped.CAUTIONInitial Installation ofBoards/ModulesTable 6-1: Initial Installation of Boards/ModulesStep Action1Refer to the site documentation and, if it was not previously done, slide all boards and modules intothe appropriate shelves as required. DO NOT SEAT the boards and modules at this time.2As the actual site hardware is installed, record the serial number of each module on a “Serial NumberChecklist” in the site logbook.6
Ethernet LANJUN 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT6-3Ethernet LAN TerminationFor proper operation, the BTS Ethernet Local Area Network (LAN)connections must be terminated with a 50–ohm loads. This is done byplacing four (4) 50–ohm BNC terminations on the LAN A and Bexternal IN and OUT connectors located on the rear of the BTS.  This isonly done on stand–alone BTSs. The front panel LAN connections arenot terminated with loads.Verify that the LAN A and B external IN and OUT connectors at the rearof the BTS have terminations installed. See Figure 6-1 for locations.Figure 6-1: LAN Connectors19MHz EVEN RESET ALARM MMIPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMRESETGLIACTIVEACTIVEACTIVEACTIVEACTIVEBPR A BPR B AUXMMIMMILAN A & BConnectionsP/O Rear Panel Rear Panel LAN ConnectorsLAN A LAN BFront Panel6
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration 6-4 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTOverviewThis section describes procedures for isolating the BTS from the spanlines, preparing and using the WinLMF, downloading system operatingsoftware, CSA reference verification/optimization, set up and calibrationof the supported test equipment, and transmit/receive paths arefunctioning properly.Before using the WinLMF, use an editor to view the“CAVEATS” section in the “readme.txt” file in the c:\wlmffolder for any applicable information.NOTEOptimization ProcessSummaryAfter a BTS is physically installed and the preliminary operations, suchas power up, have been completed, the WinLMF is used to optimize theBTS.  The basic optimization process consists of the following:1. Download GLI3 (GLI–bts#–1) with application code and data andthen enable GLI3.2. Use the WinLMF status function and verify that all of the installeddevices of the following types respond with status information:CSA, BBX, GLI3, and MCC. If a device is installed and powered upbut is not responding and is colored gray in the BTS display, thedevice is not listed in the CDF file. The CDF/NECF file must becorrected before the device can be accessed by the WinLMF.3. Download device application code and data to all devices of thefollowing types:– CSA– BBX–1X– MCC–1X4. Verify the operation of the GPS and HSO/MSO signals.5. Using the WinLMF test equipment selection function, select the testequipment to be used for the calibration.6. Calibrate the TX and RX test cables if they have not previously beencalibrated with the WinLMF computer and software build which willbe used for the optimization/calibration. Cable calibration values canbe entered manually, if required.7. Connect the required test equipment for a full optimization.8. Select all of the BBXs and all of the MCCs and use the fulloptimization function. The full optimization function performs TXcalibration, BLO download, TX audit, all TX tests, and all RX testsfor all selected devices.9. If the TX calibration fails, repeat the full optimization for any failedpaths.6
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-5DRAFT10. If the TX calibration fails again, troubleshoot and correct theproblem causing the failure, and repeat the full optimization for thefailed path.11. If the TX calibration and audit portion of the full optimization passesfor a path but some of the TX or RX tests fail, troubleshoot andcorrect the problem causing the failure, and run the individual testsas required until all TX and RX tests have passed for all paths.Cell-site TypesThe site is configured as Omni/Omni. Each cell site type has uniquecharacteristics and must be optimized accordingly.CDF/NECFThe CDF/NECF (Configuration Data File/Network ElementConfiguration File) contains information that defines the BTS and dataused to download files to the devices. A CDF/NECF file must be placedin the applicable BTS folder before the WinLMF can be used to log intothat BTS. CDF/NECF files are normally obtained from the CBSC usinga floppy disk. A file transfer protocol (ftp) method can be used if theWinLMF computer has that capability. Refer to the WinLMF Helpfunction on–line documentation for more information.The CDF/NECF includes the following information:SDownload instructions and protocolSSite specific equipage informationSCCP2 Shelf allocation plan– BBX equipage (based on cell–site type) including IS–95A/B orCDMA2000 1X capability and redundancy– CSA equipage including redundancy– Multi–Channel CDMA Card 1X channel element allocation plan.This plan indicates how the CCP2 Shelf is configured, and how thepaging, synchronization, traffic, and access channel elements (andassociated gain values) are assigned among the (up to 3) MCC–1Xsin the shelf.SEffective Rated Power (ERP) table for all TX channels to antennasrespectively. Motorola System Engineering specifies the ERP of atransmit antenna based on site geography, antenna placement, andgovernment regulations. Working from this ERP requirement, antennagain and antenna feed line loss can be combined to calculate therequired transmit power at the frame antenna connections. Thecorresponding BBX output power required to achieve that power levelon any channel/sector can then be determined based on Bay LevelOffset (BLO) data established during the optimization process.6
Introduction to Optimization and Calibration  – continued 6-6 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTRefer to Figure 6-2 and the WinLMF Help function on–linedocumentation for additional information on the layout ofthe WinLMF directory structure (including CDF/NECF filelocations and formats).NOTEBTS System SoftwareDownloadBTS system software must be successfully downloaded to the BTSprocessor boards before optimization can be performed. BTS operatingcode is loaded from the WinLMF computer terminal.The BTS is configured for Circuit Backhaul and uses bts.cdf files. BTSsconfigured for Packet Backhaul use bts.necf files (bts–xxx.xml) locatedon the OMC–R.Before using the WinLMF for optimization/ATP, thecorrect bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files forthe BTS must be obtained from the CBSC and put in abts–# folder in the WinLMF. Failure to use the correctCDF/NECF files can cause wrong results. Failure to usethe correct CDF/NECF files to log into a live (trafficcarrying) site can shut down the site.NOTEThe CDF/NECF is normally obtained from the CBSC on a DOSformatted diskette, or through a file transfer protocol (ftp) if theWinLMF computer has ftp capability. Refer to the WinLMF Helpfunction on–line documentation for the procedure.Site Equipage VerificationIf you have not already done so, use an editor to view the CDF/NECF,and review the site documentation. Verify the site engineering equipagedata in the CDF/NECF matches the actual site hardware using aCDF/NECF conversion table.Use extreme care not to make any changes to theCDF/NECF content while viewing the file. Changes to theCDF/NECF can cause the site to operate unreliably orrender it incapable of operation.Always wear a conductive, high impedance wrist strapwhile handling any circuit card/module to prevent damageby ESD. Extreme care should be taken during the removaland installation of any card/module. After removal, thecard/module should be placed on a conductive surface orback into the anti–static bag in which it was shipped.CAUTION6
Preparing the LMFJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-7DRAFTOverview of Packet BTS filesR16.0 and earlier releases had the configuration file called CDF for eachBTS and CBSC used by WinLMF. In 16.1 Packet BTS, BTS with GLI3booting in packet binary, the CDF is replaced by two new configurationfiles called Network Element Configuration Base (NECB) and NetworkElement Change Journal (NECJ). The NECB contains the baselineconfiguration and is analogous to the CDF, while the NECJ contains allthe changes made to the configuration since the last time the NECB wasre–generated. Once the NECJ gets to 80% of its maximum size, theNECB is re–generated and all the updates are rolled into it.These files play much broader and vital role than previous CDF files.GLI3 booting in circuit binaries works similar to R16.0.A few WinLMF related important facts about these files are listed below.SBoth files (NECB and NECJ) are in XML format.SNECB contains all the up-to-date static configuration information andNECJ contains all the recent changes (including operations) which arenot updated in the NECB.SBoth files can be viewed in any XML viewer (most easily available isInternet Explorer V5.0 and higher). They can be also viewed by anyother word processor, but the XML tags will also be seen with them.SThese files will be created by OMC–R from MIB as per the BTSprovisioning.SThese files will be regenerated for each software release upgrade onthe system for each BTS.SThese files will reside on both OMC–R and Packet–GLI3 (unlikeCDF) and will be synchronized periodically between them.SBoth NECB and NECJ file contain a “SoftwareVersion” field in theirheader section indicating the system release version of these files.SInstead of the bts#.cdf file, the packet WinLMF uses a bts#.XML file,which is a copy of the NECB.XML file.SPacket–GLI3 will need these files for site initialization.SThe scope of NECB has grown much broader than CDF and has muchmore BTS centric information. The use of generic version of thesefiles should be strictly avoided for the correct site initialization.6
Preparing the LMF  – continued 6-8 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTWinLMF Features andInstallation RequirementsBefore optimization can be performed, the WinLMF application softwaremust be installed and configured on a computer platform meetingMotorola–specified requirements.For the WinLMF graphics to display properly, thecomputer platform must be configured to display morethan 256 colors. See the operating system softwareinstructions for verifying and configuring the displaysettings.NOTESoftware and files for installing and updating the WinLMF are providedon CD ROM disks. The following items must be available:SWinLMF application program on CD ROMSCDF/NECF for each supported BTS (on diskette or available from theCBSC)SCBSC File for each supported BTS (on floppy disk or CD ROM)FTP ServerTo be able to download files to the GLI3, the WinLMF now runs FTPserver on the WinLMF laptop. The WinLMF FTP server runs from theLMFs home directory. All the files necessary to run the WinLMF FTPserver are installed from the WinLMF CD. The FTP server isautomatically started by the WinLMF upon successful Login to a PacketBTS.In addition, the WinLMF provides a new option in the Tools menu calledFTP Server. The option starts the LMFs FTP server if Start is selected,and stops the server if Stop is selected. The LMFs FTP server runs onport 21. If any other process is using that port, the error message isdisplayed to the user stating that the port is occupied. There is anotheroption under FTP Server menu called FTP Monitor, which allows theuser to watch FTP activity b/w the WinLMF and GLI.FirewallsFirewalls will block the FTP requests from the Packet GLI to theWinLMF laptop. You must disable your firewall before attempting theBTS Synch command. Some common firewall programs to look forinclude Network ICE, BlackICE, Norton’s Desktop Firewall, EnterpriseFirewall, and Personal Firewall.6
Preparing the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-9DRAFTFTP Server Port in useOn some Windows 2000 installations, a process called “inetd.exe”makes the FTP server port 21 unusable by the WinLMF. If the WinLMFreports that the FTP server could not start because the port is in use,make sure the inetd.exe is not running by using the Task Manager’sprocess list. If inetd.exe is running, end the process by selecting it andclicking the “End Process” button. Inetd32.exe is NOT the same andending it will not resolve this problem.WinLMF File StructureOverviewThe WinLMF uses a <x>:\<lmf home directory> folder that contains allof the essential data for installing and maintaining the BTS. Thefollowing list outlines the folder structure for WinLMF. Except for thebts-nnn folders, these folders are created as part of the WinLMFinstallation. Refer to the CDMA WinLMF Operator’s Guide for acomplete description of the folder structure.Figure 6-2: WinLMF Folder Structureversion folder (A separate folder isrequired for each different version; forexample, a folder name 2.8.1.1.1.5.)loads folder(C:)x:\<lmf home directory> foldercdma foldercode folderdata folderBTS–nnn folders (A separate folder isrequired for each BTS where bts–nnn is theunique BTS number; for example, bts–163.)The “loads” folder and all the folders below it are notavailable from the WinLMF for Software Release 2.16.3.x.These folders may be present as as a legacy from previoussoftware versions or downloaded from the OMC–R/CBSC.NOTEWinLMF Home DirectoryThe WinLMF installation program creates the default home directory,c:\wlmf, and installs the application files and subdirectories (folders)in it. Because this can be changed at installation, the CDMA WinLMFhome directory will be referred to with the generic convention of:6
Preparing the LMF  – continued 6-10 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFT<x>:\<lmf home directory>Where:<x> = the WinLMF computer drive letter where the CDMA WinLMFhome directory is located.<lmf home directory> = the directory path or name where the CDMAWinLMF is installed.NECF Filename Conventionsand Directory LocationNECFThe NECF actually consists of two files: the NECB  and NECJ. Thenaming convention for the NECB and NECJ is:NECB*bts#.xmlNECJ*bts#.xmlWhere:* = any characters can be substituted there# = the actual integer BTS numberThe NECB and its corresponding NECJ must have the exact same name,except for the “B” and “J” difference after the initial NEC characters.The NECB and the NECJ must reside in the<WinLMF_HOME>\cdma\bts–# directory corresponding to the BTSframe they are for.Load Information File (LIF)The LIF contains all the devices binaries available for the specifiedSystem Software Release. It is the functional equivalent of the OLF filethat was used pre–Packet.The naming convention for the LIF is:NE_LIF.xmlThe LIF must reside in the <WinLMF_HOME>\cdma\loads\<SoftwareRelease Number> directory, where <WinLMF_HOME> = the homedirectory in which the WinLMF is installed, usually C:\wlmf <SoftwareRelease Number> = the System Software Release Number (e.g.2.16.1.0.10).Cal FileThe Cal File still resides in the <WinLMF_HOME>\cdma\bts–#directory and is named bts–#.cal, where # is the actual integer number ofthe BTS.6
Preparing the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-11DRAFTWinLMF Operating SystemInstallationThis section provides information and instructions for installing andupdating the WinLMF software and files.First Time Installation SequenceSInstall Java Runtime Environment (JRE)SInstall U/WIN K–shell emulatorSInstall WinLMF application programsSInstall/create BTS foldersAny time you install U/WIN, you must install theWinLMF software because the installation of the WinLMFmodifies some of the files that are installed during theU/Win installation. Installing U/Win over–writes thesemodifications.There are multiple binary image packages for installationon the CD–ROM. When prompted, choose the load thatcorresponds to the switch release that you currently haveinstalled. Perform the Device Images install after theWinLMF installation.If applicable, a separate CD ROM of BTS Binaries may beavailable for binary updates.NOTEFollow the procedure in Table 6-2 to install the WinLMF applicationprogram using the WinLMF CD ROM.Table 6-2: Install WinLMF using CD ROMnStep Action1Insert the WinLMF CD ROM disk into your disk drive and perform the following as required:1a – If the Setup screen appears, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.1b – If the Setup screen is not displayed, proceed to Step 2.2Click on the Start button3 Select Run.4 Enter d:\autorun in the Open box and click OK.NOTEIf applicable, replace the letter d with the correct CD ROM drive letter. 6
Preparing the LMF  – continued 6-12 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTCopy BTS CDF (or NECF) andCBSC CDF Files to the WinLMFComputerBefore logging on to a BTS with the WinLMF computer to executeoptimization/ATP procedures, the correct bts-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) andcbsc-#.cdf files must be obtained from the CBSC and put in a bts-#folder in the WinLMF computer. This requires creating versions of theCBSC CDF files on a DOS–formatted floppy diskette and using thediskette to install the CDF files on the WinLMF computer.If the WinLMF has ftp capability, the ftp method can beused to copy the CDF or NECF files from the CBSC.On Sun OS workstations, the unix2dos command can beused in place of the cp command (e.g., unix2dosbts–248.cdf bts–248.cdf). This should be done using acopy of the CBSC CDF file so the original CBSC CDF fileis not changed to DOS format.When copying CDF or NECF files, comply with thefollowing to prevent BTS login problems with theWindows WinLMF:– The numbers used in the bts-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf)and cbsc-#.cdf filenames must correspond to thelocally-assigned numbers for each BTS and itscontrolling CBSC.– The generic cbsc–1.cdf file supplied with theWindows WinLMF will work with locally numberedBTS CDF files. Using this file will not provide avalid optimization unless the generic file is edited toreplace default parameters (e.g., channel numbers)with the operational parameters used locally.NOTEThe procedure in Table 6-3 lists the steps required to transfer the CDFfiles from the CBSC to the WinLMF computer. For further information,refer to the WinLMF Help function on–line documentation.Table 6-3: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the WinLMF ComputernStep ActionAT THE CBSC:1Login to the CBSC workstation.2Insert a DOS–formatted floppy diskette in the workstation drive.3 Type eject –q and press the Enter key.. . . continued on next page6
Preparing the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-13DRAFTTable 6-3: Copying CDF or NECF Files to the WinLMF ComputernActionStep4 Type mount and press the Enter key.NOTESLook for the “floppy/no_name” message on the last line displayed.SIf the eject command was previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with a number.Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed when performing step 7.5Change to the directory, where the files to be copied reside, by typing cd <directoryname>(e.g., cd bts–248) and pressing the Enter key.6 Type ls and press the Enter key to display the list of files in the directory.7 With Solaris versions of Unix, create DOS–formatted versions of the bts-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) andcbsc-#.cdf files on the diskette by entering the following command:unix2dos <source filename>  /floppy/no_name/<target filename>(e.g., unix2dos bts–248.cdf  /floppy/no_name/bts–248.cdf).NOTESOther versions of Unix do not support the unix2dos and dos2unix commands. In these cases, usethe Unix cp (copy) command. The copied files will be difficult to read with a DOS or Windows texteditor because Unix files do not contain line feed characters. Editing copied CDF files on theWinLMF computer is, therefore, not recommended.SUsing cp, multiple files can be copied in one operation by separating each filename to be copiedwith a space and ensuring the destination directory (floppy/no_name) is listed at the end of thecommand string following a space (e.g., cp  bts–248.cdf  cbsc–6.cdf  /floppy/no_name).8Repeat Steps 5 through 7 for each bts–# that must be supported by the WinLMF computer.9When all required files have been copied to the diskette type eject and press the Enter key.10 Remove the diskette from the CBSC drive.AT THE WinLMF:11 If it is not running, start the Windows operating system on the WinLMF computer.12 Insert the diskette containing the bts-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc-#.cdf files into the WinLMFcomputer.13 Using MS Windows Explorer, create a corresponding bts–# folder in the <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\cdma directory for each bts–#.cdf/cbsc–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf/cbsc–#.cdf) file pair copiedfrom the CBSC.14 Use MS Windows Explorer to transfer the  bts-#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc-#.cdf files from thediskette to the corresponding <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts–# folders created in Step 13. 6
Preparing the LMF  – continued 6-14 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTCreating a NamedHyperTerminal Connection forMMI CommunicationConfirming or changing the configuration data of certain BTS FieldReplaceable Units (FRU) requires establishing an MMI communicationsession between the WinLMF and the FRU. Using features of theWindows operating system, the connection properties for an MMIsession can be saved on the WinLMF computer as a named WindowsHyperTerminal connection. This eliminates the need for setting upconnection parameters each time an MMI session is required to supportoptimization.Once the named connection is saved, a shortcut for it can be created onthe Windows desktop. Double–clicking the shortcut icon will start theconnection without the need to negotiate multiple menu levels.Follow the procedures in Table 6-4 to establish a named HyperTerminalconnection and create a Windows desktop shortcut for it.Table 6-4: Create HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action1From the Windows Start menu, select:Programs>Accessories>2Perform one of the following:SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and then click on HyperTerminal orSFor Win 98, select Communications, double click the Hyperterminal folder, and then double clickon the Hyperterm.exe icon in the window that opens.NOTESIf a Location Information Window appears, enter the required information, then click on theClose button. (This is required the first time, even if a modem is not to be used.)SIf a You need to install a modem..... message appears, click on NO.3When the Connection Description box opens:– Type a name for the connection being defined (e.g., MMI Session) in the Name: window,– Highlight any icon preferred for the named connection in the Icon: chooser window, and– Click  OK.4From the Connect using: pick list in the Connect To box displayed, select COM1 or COM2 (WinNT) – or Direct to Com 1 or Direct to Com 2 (Win 98) for the RS–232 port connection and click OK.NOTEFor WinLMF computer configurations where COM1 is used by another interface such as testequipment and a physical port is available for COM2, select COM2 in the following step to preventconflicts.. . . continued on next page6
Preparing the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-15DRAFTTable 6-4: Create HyperTerminal ConnectionStep Action5In the Port Settings tab of the COM# Properties window displayed, configure the RS–232 portsettings as follows:SBits per second:  9600SData bits:  8SParity:  NoneSStop bits:  1SFlow control:  None6 Click OK.7Save the defined connection by selecting:File > Save8Close the HyperTerminal window by selecting:File > Exit9Click the Yes button to disconnect when prompted.10 Perform one of the following:SIf the Hyperterminal folder window is still open (Win 98) proceed to step 12SFrom the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Accessories.11 Perform one of the following:SFor Win NT, select Hyperterminal and release any pressed mouse buttons.SFor Win 98, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.SFor Win–XP, select Communications and double click the Hyperterminal folder.12 Highlight the newly–created connection icon by clicking on it.13 Right click and drag the highlighted connection icon to the Windows desktop and release the rightmouse button.14 From the popup menu which appears, select Create Shortcut(s) Here.15 If desired, reposition the shortcut icon for the new connection by dragging it to another location on theWindows desktop.16 Close the Hyperterminal folder window by selecting:File > Close 6
Span Lines – Interface and IsolationJUN 20041X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT6-16T1/E1 Span InterfaceAt active sites, the OMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTSand place it out–of–service (OOS). DO NOT remove thespan line cable connectors until the OMC–R/CBSC hasdisabled the BTS.NOTEBefore connecting the WinLMF computer to the BTS LAN, theOMC–R/CBSC must disable the BTS and place it OOS. This will allowthe WinLMF to control the BTS, and prevent the CBSC frominadvertently sending control information to the BTS duringWinLMF–based tests.Isolate BTS from T1/E1 SpansOnce the OMC–R/CBSC has disabled the BTS, the spans must bedisabled to ensure the WinLMF will maintain control of the BTS.T1/E1 Span IsolationTable 6-5 describes the action required for span isolation.Table 6-5: T1/E1 Span IsolationStep Action1Have the OMC–R/CBSC operator place the BTS OOS.2To disable the span lines, disconnect the span or spans from the CBIO Network Span–1X or Group 1Span–EVDO sockets.If in an outdoor configuration, then unlock and open TME left side door  to gain access to rear of BTS.6
LMF to BTS ConnectionJUN 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT6-17Connect the WinLMF to theBTSThe WinLMF computer may be connected to the LAN A or B connectorlocated on the front panel or at the rear of the BTS. Figure 6-3 belowshows the general location of these connectors. LAN A is considered theprimary LAN.Table 6-6: Connecting the WinLMF to the BTS nStep Action1For indoor configuration, remove BTS front panel cover.For outdoor configuration, unlock and open TME right side door and remove BTS front panel cover.NOTEXircom Model PE3–10B2 or equivalent can also be used to interface the WinLMF Ethernetconnection to the BTS frame connected to the PC parallel port, powered by an external AC/DCtransformer. In this case, the BNC cable must not exceed 91 cm (3 ft) in length.2Connect the WinLMF computer to the LAN A (left–hand) BNC connector . (See Figure 6-3)* IMPORTANTThe LAN shield is isolated from chassis ground. The LAN shield (exposed portion of BNC connector)must not touch the chassis during optimization.ETHERNET B LMFCONNECTIONRemove panel to gainaccess to the site 1 orsite 2 LMF BNCconnector. ETHERNET A LMFCONNECTIONPCMCIA ETHERNETADAPTER10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTER CONNECTSDIRECTLY TO LAN A    115 VAC POWERCONNECTIONFRONT OF BTSWITH PANELCOVER REMOVEDFigure 6-3: WinLMF Connection DetailIf lap top is equipped with anethernet port, then PCMCIAethernet adapter is not required6
Using the LMF 6-18 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTBasic LMF OperationLMF Coverage in This Publication – The LMF application programsupports maintenance of both CDMA and SAS BTSs. All references tothe LMF in this publication are to the CDMA portion of the program.Operating Environments – The LMF application program allows theuser to work in the two following operating environments which areaccessed using the specified desktop icons:SGraphical User Interface (GUI) using the WinLMF iconSCommand Line Interface (CLI) using the WinLMF CDMA CLI iconThe GUI is the primary optimization and acceptance testing operatingenvironment. The CLI environment provides additional capability to theuser to perform manually controlled acceptance tests and audit theresults of optimization and calibration actions.Basic Operation – Basic operation of the LMF in either environmentincludes performing the following:SSelecting and deselecting BTS devicesSEnabling devicesSDisabling devicesSResetting devicesSObtaining device statusThe following additional basic operation can be performed in a GUIenvironment:SSorting a status report windowFor detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.Unless otherwise noted, LMF procedures in this manualare performed using the GUI environment.NOTE6
Using the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-19DRAFTThe LMF Display and the BTSBTS Display – When the LMF is logged into a BTS, a frame tab isdisplayed for each BTS frames. The frame tab will be labeled with“CDMA” and the BTS number, a dash, and the frame number (forexample, BTS–812–1 for BTS 812, RFMF 1). If there is only one framefor the BTS, there will only be one tab.CDF/NECF Requirements – For the LMF to recognize the devicesinstalled in the BTS, a BTS CDF/NECF file which includes equipageinformation for all the devices in the BTS must be located in theapplicable <x>:\<lmf home directory>\cdma\bts–# folder. To providethe necessary channel assignment data for BTS operation, a CBSC CDFfile which includes channel data for all BTS RFMFs is also required inthe folder.Graphical User InterfaceOverviewThe LMF uses a GUI, which works in the following way:SSelect the device or devices.SSelect the action to apply to the selected device(s).SWhile action is in progress, a status report window displays the actiontaking place and other status information.SThe status report window indicates when the the action is completeand displays other pertinent information.SClicking the OK button closes the status report window.Understanding GUI OperationThe following screen captures are provided to help understand how theGUI operates:– Figure 6-4 depicts the differences between packet and circuitCDMA “cdf” file identification. Note that if there is a packetversion “bts” file, the “(P)” is added as a suffix. There is acorresponding “(C)” for the circuit mode version.– Figure 6-5 depicts the Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs) stateof a packet mode. Note that an “X” is on the front of each card thatis under Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) control by theGLI3 card.– Figure 6-6 depicts three of the available packet mode commands.Normally the GLI3 has Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs)control of all cards as shown in Figure 6-5 by an “(X)”. In that statethe LMF may only status a card. In order to download code or test acard, the LMF must request Self-Managed Network Elements (NEs)control of the card by using the shown dropdown menu. It also usesthis menu to release control of the card back to the GLI3. The GLI3will also assume control of the cards after the LMF logs out of theBTS. The packet mode GLI3 normally is loaded with a tape release6
Using the LMF  – continued 6-20 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTand NECB and NECJ files which point to a tape release stored onthe GLI3. When the GLI3 has control of a card it will maintain thatcard with the code on that tape release.– Figure 6-7 depicts a packet mode site that has the MCC–1 and theBBX–1 cards under LMF control. Notice that the “X” is missingfrom the front of these two cards.For detailed information on performing these and other LMF operations,refer to the LMF Help function on–line documentation.Figure 6-4: BTS Login Screen – Identifying Circuit and Packet BTS Files6
Using the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-21DRAFTFigure 6-5: Self–Managed Network Elements (NEs) State of a Packet Mode6
Using the LMF  – continued 6-22 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 6-6: Available Packet Mode Commands6
Using the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-23DRAFTFigure 6-7: Packet Mode Site with MCC–1 and BBX–1 under LMF Control6
Using the LMF  – continued 6-24 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTCommand Line InterfaceOverviewThe LMF also provides Command Line Interface (CLI) capability.Activate the CLI by clicking on a shortcut icon on the desktop. The CLIcan not be launched from the GUI, only from the desktop icon.Both the GUI and the CLI use a program known as the handler. Only onehandler can be running at one time. The architectural  design is such thatthe GUI must be started before the CLI if you want the GUI and CLI touse the same handler.When the CLI is launched after the GUI, the CLI automatically finds anduses an in–progress login session with a BTS initiated under the GUI.This allows the use of the GUI and the CLI in the same BTS loginsession.If a CLI handler is already running when the GUI is launched (thishappens if the CLI window is already running when the user starts theGUI, or if another copy of the GUI is already running when the userstarts the GUI), a dialog window displays the following warningmessage:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure that you want to start the application?This window also contains yes and no buttons. Selecting yes starts theapplication. Selecting no terminates the application.CLI Format ConventionsThe CLI command can be broken down in the following way:SVerbSDevice including device identifier parametersSSwitchSOption parameters consisting of:– Keywords– Equals sign (=) between the keyword and the parameter value– Parameter valuesSpaces are required between the verb, device, switch, and optionparameters. A hyphen is required between the device and its identifiers.Following is an example of a CLI command.measure bbx–<bts_id>–<bbx_id> rssi channel=6 sector=5Refer to the LMF CLI Commands for a complete explanation of the CLIcommands and their usage.6
Using the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-25DRAFTLogging Into a BTSLogging into a BTS establishes a communication link between the BTSand the LMF. An LMF session can be logged into only one BTS at atime.PrerequisitesBefore attempting to log into a BTS, ensure the following have beencompleted:SThe LMF is correctly installed on the LMF computer.SA bts-nnn folder with the correct CDF/NECF and CBSC files exists.SThe LMF computer was connected to the BTS before starting theWindows operating system and the LMF software. If necessary, restartthe computer after connecting it to the BTS in accordance withTable 6-6 and Figure 6-3.Be sure that the correct bts–#.cdf/necf and cbsc–#.cdf fileare used for the BTS. These should be the CDF/NECF filesthat are provided for the BTS by the CBSC. Failure to usethe correct CDF/NECF files can result in invalidoptimization. Failure to use the correct CDF/NECF filesto log into a live (traffic–carrying) site can shut downthe site.CAUTIONBTS Login from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 6-7 to log into a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 6-7: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Start the LMF GUI environment by double–clicking on the WinLMF desktop icon (if the LMF isnot running).– An LMF window will open and display the LMF build number in the title bar.NOTEIf a warning similar to the following is displayed, select No, shut down other LMF sessions whichmay be running, and start the LMF GUI environment again:The CLI handler is already running.This may cause conflicts with the LMF.Are you sure you want to start the application?Yes No2Click on Login tab (if not displayed).3Double click on CDMA (in the Available Base Stations pick list).. . . continued on next page6
Using the LMF  – continued 6-26 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 6-7: BTS GUI Login ProcedurenActionStep4Click on the desired BTS number.5Click on the Network Login tab (if not already in the forefront).6Enter correct IP address (normally 128.0.0.2) for a field BTS, if not correctly displayed in the IPAddress box.7Type in the correct IP Port number (normally 9216) if not correctly displayed in the IP Port box.8Click on Ping.– If the connection is successful, the Ping Display window shows text similar to the following:Reply from 128 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255– If there is no response the following is displayed:128.0.0.2:9216:Timed outIf the GLI fails to respond, reset and perform the ping process again. If the GLI still fails torespond, typical problems are shorted BNC to inter–frame cabling, open cables, crossed A and Blink cables, missing 50–Ohm terminators, or the GLI itself.9If required, match the device corresponding to the BTS configuration by  selectingMulti-channel Preselector type from the Multi-channel Preselector drop–down list (default isMPC).10 Click on Login. (A BTS tab with the BTS and frame numbers is displayed.)NOTESIf an attempt is made to log into a BTS that is already logged on, all devices will be gray.SThere may be instances where the BTS initiates a log out due to a system error (i.e., a devicefailure).SIf the GLI is OOS–ROM (blue), it must be downloaded with RAM code before other devicescan be seen.SIf the GLI is OOS–RAM (yellow), it must be enabled before other installed devices can be seen. 6
Using the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-27DRAFTBTS Login from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedures in Table 6-8 to log into a BTS when using theCLI environment.If the CLI and GUI environments are to be used at thesame time, the GUI must be started first and BTS loginmust be performed from the GUI. Refer to Table 6-7 tostart the GUI environment and log into a BTS.NOTETable 6-8: BTS CLI Login ProcedurenStep Action1Double–click the WinLMF CLI desktop icon (if the LMF CLI environment is not alreadyrunning).NOTEIf a BTS was logged into under a GUI session before the CLI environment was started, the CLIsession will be logged into the same BTS, and step 2 is not required.2At the /wlmf prompt, enter the following command:login bts–<bts#>  host=<host>  port=<port>where:host = GLI card IP address (defaults to address last logged into for this BTS or 128.0.0.2 if this isfirst login to this BTS)port = IP port of the BTS (defaults to port last logged into for this BTS or 9216 if this is first loginto this BTS)A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:08:18.882 Command Received and Accepted             COMMAND=login bts–3313:08:18.882 Command In Progress13:08:21.275 Command Successfully Completed             REASON_CODE=”No Reason” 6
Using the LMF  – continued 6-28 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTLogging OutLogging out of a BTS is accomplished differently for the GUI and CLIoperating environments.The GUI and CLI environments use the same connection toa BTS. If a GUI and the CLI session are running for thesame BTS at the same time, logging out of the BTS ineither environment will log out of it for both. When eithera login or logout is performed in the CLI window, there isno GUI indication that the login or logout has occurred.NOTELogging Out of a BTS from the GUI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 6-9 to logout of a BTS when using theGUI environment.Table 6-9: BTS GUI Logout ProcedurenStep Action1Click on BTS in the BTS menu bar.2Click the Logout item in the pull–down menu (a Confirm Logout pop-up message will appear).3Click on Yes (or press the Enter key) to confirm logout. The Login tab will appear.NOTEIf a logout was previously performed on the BTS from a CLI window running at the same time asthe GUI, a Logout Error pop–up message will appear stating the system could not log out of theBTS. When this occurs, the GUI must be exited and restarted before it can be used for furtheroperations.4If a Logout Error pop–up message appears stating that the system could not log out of the BaseStation because the given BTS is not logged in, click OK and proceed to Step 5.5 Select File > Exit in the window menu bar, click Yes in the Confirm Logout pop–up, and clickOK in the Logout Error pop–up which appears again.6If further work is to be done in the GUI, restart it.NOTESThe Logout item on the BTS menu bar will only log you out of the displayed BTS.SYou can also log out of all BTS sessions and exit LMF by clicking on the File selection in themenu bar and selecting Exit from the File menu list. A Confirm Logout pop–up message willappear. 6
Using the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-29DRAFTLogging Out of a BTS from the CLI EnvironmentFollow the procedure in Table 6-10 to logout of a BTS when using theCLI environment.Table 6-10: BTS CLI Logout ProcedurenStep ActionNOTEIf the BTS is also logged into from a GUI running at the same time and further work must be donewith it in the GUI, proceed to Step 2.1Log out of a BTS by entering the following command:logout bts–<bts#>A response similar to the following will be displayed:LMF>13:24:51.028  Command Received and AcceptedCOMMAND=logout bts–3313:24:51.028 Command In Progress13:24:52.04 Command Successfully CompletedREASON_CODE=”No Reason”2If desired, close the CLI interface by entering the following command:exitA response similar to the following will be displayed before the window closes:Killing background processes.... 6
Using the LMF  – continued 6-30 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTEstablishing an MMICommunication SessionEquipment Connection – Figure 6-8 illustrates common equipmentconnections for the LMF computer. For specific connection locations onFRUs, refer to the illustration accompanying the procedures whichrequire the MMI communication session.If the Motorola SLN2006A MMI Interface Kit is not available, an MMIcable can be made, refer to Appendix D for more information.Initiate MMI Communication – For those procedures which requireMMI communication between the LMF and BTS FRUs, follow theprocedures in Table 6-11 to initiate the communication session.Table 6-11: Establishing MMI CommunicationStep Action1Connect the LMF computer to the equipment as detailed in the applicable procedure which requiresthe MMI communication session. Refer to Figure 6-8 or Figure 6-9 using the GLI3 as an example.2If the LMF computer has only one serial port (COM1) and the LMF is running, disconnect the LMFfrom COM1 by performing the following:2a – Click on Tools in the LMF window menu bar, and select Options from the pull–down menu list.–– An LMF Options dialog box will appear.2b – In the LMF Options dialog box, click the Disconnect Port button on the Serial Connection tab.3Start the named HyperTerminal connection for MMI sessions by double clicking on its Windowsdesktop shortcut.NOTEIf a Windows desktop shortcut was not created for the MMI connection, access the connection from theWindows Start menu by selecting:Programs > Accessories > Hyperterminal > HyperTerminal > <Named HyperTerminalConnection (e.g., MMI Session)>4Once the connection window opens, establish MMI communication with the BTS FRU by pressingthe LMF computer <Enter>key until the prompt identified in the applicable procedure is obtained. 6
Using the LMF  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-31DRAFTFigure 6-8: LMF Computer Common MMI Connections – Motorola MMI Interface Kit, SLN2006ANULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)8–PIN TO 10–PINRS–232 CABLE(P/N 30–09786R01)RS–232 CABLE8–PINLMFCOMPUTERDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1ORCOM2FW00687MMIConnectorTo MMIConnectorRESETButton6
Using the LMF  – continued 6-32 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFABRICATED MMI CABLE(SEE MMI CABLEFABRICATION APPENDIX D)DB–9CONNECTOR8–PINLMF COMPUTEROR EQUIVALENTTo MMIConnectorCOM1ORCOM2MMIConnectorRESETButtonFigure 6-9: MMI Connection Detail – Fabricated MMI CableOnline HelpTask oriented online help is available in the LMF by clicking on Help inthe window menu bar, and selecting LMF Help from the pull–downmenu.6
Pinging the ProcessorsJUN 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT6-33Pinging the BTSFor proper operation, the integrity of the Ethernet LAN A and B linksmust be verified. Figure 6-10 represents a typical BTS Ethernetconfiguration. The drawing depicts cabling and termination for both theA and B LANs.Ping is a program that sends request data packets to hosts on a network,in this case GLI modules on the BTS LAN, to obtain a response from the“target” host specified by an IP address.Follow the steps in Table 6-12 to ping each processor (on both LAN Aand LAN B) and verify LAN redundancy is working properly.CAUTION Always wear an approved anti–static wrist strap while handlingany circuit card/module to prevent damage by ESD.SIGNALGROUNDSIGNALGROUND50ΩBINSIGNALGROUND50Ω50ΩSIGNALGROUND50ΩSIGNALGROUNDCHASSIS GROUNDTERMINATION TERMINATIONAINBOUT AOUTSC4812ETL0013–5Figure 6-10:  BTS Ethernet LAN Termination DiagramTERMINATIONTERMINATION6
Pinging the ProcessorsJUN 20041X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT6-34NOTE The Ethernet LAN A and B cables and/or terminations must beinstalled on each frame/enclosure external LAN connector beforeperforming this test. All other processor board LAN connectionsare made through the backplanes.Table 6-12: Pinging the ProcessorsStep Action1If this is a first–time communication with a newly–installed frame or a GLI card which has beenreplaced, perform the procedure in Table 11-3 and then return to step 2.2Be sure any uncabled LAN A and B IN and OUT connectors at the rear of BTS are terminated with 50Ω loads.3If it has not already been done, connect the LMF computer to the BTS.4If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 6-7).5Remove the 50Ω termination on the BTS LAN B IN connector.– The LMF session should remain active.6Replace the 50Ω termination on the BTS LAN B IN connector.7From the Windows desktop, click the Start button and select Run.8In the Open box, type ping and the GLI IP address (for example, ping 128.0.0.2).NOTE128.0.0.2 is the default IP address for the GLI card in slot GLI–1 in field BTS units.9Click on OK.10 If the targeted module responds, a DOS window will appear with a display similar to the following:Reply from 128.0.0.2: bytes=32 time=3ms TTL=255– If the device responds, proceed to step 18.If there is no response, the following is displayed:Request timed out– If the GLI fails to respond, it should be reset and re–pinged. If it still fails to respond, typicalproblems would be: failure of the LMF to login, shorted BNC–to–inter-frame cabling, opencables, crossed A and B link cables, or the GLI itself.11 Logout of the BTS as described in Table 6-9, exit from the LMF program, and restart the Windowsoperating system on the LMF computer.12 Restart the LMF GUI program as described in LMF Help function on–line documentation, and log intothe BTS as described in Table 6-7.13 Perform steps 7 through 10 again.– If the device responds, proceed to step 18.If there is still no response, proceed to step 14.. . . continued on next page6
Pinging the ProcessorsJUN 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT6-35Table 6-12: Pinging the ProcessorsStep Action14 If ping was unsuccessful after restarting the LMF computer, press the GLI front panel reset pushbuttonand perform steps 7 through 10 again.15 After the BTS has been successfully pinged, be sure the 50Ω termination was replaced on the BTSLAN B IN connector at the rear of the BTS. Disconnect the LMF cable from the front LAN Aconnector, and connect it to front LAN B (right–hand connector).16 Remove the 50Ω termination on the BTS LAN A IN connector.17 Repeat steps 5 through 9 using LAN B.18 After the BTS has been successfully pinged on the secondary LAN, replace the 50Ω termination onthe BTS LAN A IN connector.19 Disconnect the LMF cable from the LAN B and connect it to LAN A.20 Remove and replace the 50Ω termination on the LAN B IN connector to force the GLI to switch toprimary LAN A.21 Repeat steps 5 through 9 to ensure proper primary LAN operation. 6
Download the BTS 6-36 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTOverviewBefore a BTS can operate, each equipped device must contain deviceinitialization (ROM) code. ROM code is loaded in all devices duringmanufacture, factory repair, or, for software upgrades, from the CBSCusing the DownLoad Manager (DLM). Device application (RAM) codeand data must be downloaded to each equipped device by the user beforethe BTS can be made fully functional for the site where it is installed.ROM CodeDownloading ROM code to BTS devices from the LMF is NOT routinemaintenance or a normal part of the optimization process. It is onlydone in unusual situations where the resident ROM code release level inthe device is not compatible with the required release level of the siteoperating software and the CBSC can not communicate with the BTS toperform the download.If you must download ROM code, the procedures are located inAppendix C.Before ROM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct ROMcode file for each device to be loaded must exist on the LMF computer.ROM code must be manually selected for download.The ROM code file is not available for GLI3s. GLI3s areROM code loaded at the factory.NOTEROM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being downloaded will change toOOS_ROM (blue). The device will remain OOS_ROM (blue) when thedownload is completed. A compatible revision–level RAM code mustthen be downloaded to the device. Compatible code loads for ROM andRAM must be used for the device type to ensure proper performance.The compatible device code release levels for the Base Station System(BSS) software release being used are listed in the Version Matrixsection of the SCt CDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tape orCD–ROM containing the BSS software).RAM CodeBefore RAM code can be downloaded from the LMF, the correct RAMcode file for each device must exist on the LMF computer. RAM codecan be automatically or manually selected depending on the Devicemenu item chosen and where the RAM code file for the device is storedin the LMF file structure. The RAM code file will be selectedautomatically if the file is in the <x>:\<lmf homedirectory>\cdma\loads\n.n.n.n\code folder (where n.n.n.n is thedownload code version number that matches the “NextLoad” parameterof the CDF file). The RAM code file in the code folder must have thecorrect hardware bin number for the device to be loaded.6
Download the BTS  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-37DRAFTRAM code can be downloaded to a device that is in any state. After thedownload is started, the device being loaded will change to OOS_ROM(blue). When the download is completed successfully, the device willchange to OOS_RAM (yellow).When code is downloaded to a GLI, the LMF automatically alsodownloads data and then enables the GLI. When enabled, the GLI willchange to INS_ACT (bright green).For non–GLI devices, data must be downloaded after RAM code isdownloaded. To download data, the device state must be OOS_RAM(yellow).If an MCC–DO card is in use, it can only be loaded using the LocalMaintenance Tool (LMT). LMT is software designed specifically for theMCC–DO card. To avoid confusion and duplication of effort, refer toMotorola Lifecycles website athttp://www.motorola.com/networkoperators/CDMA–1xEV–DO.htm forfurther information on LMT or MCC–DO.The devices to be loaded with RAM code and data are:SGroup Line Interface III (GLI3)SClock Synchronization and Alarm card (CSA) (Only if new revisioncode must be loaded)SMulti–Channel CDMA (MCC–1X) cardsSBroad Band Transceiver (BBX–1X) cardsThe GLI must be successfully downloaded with RAM codeand data, and in INS_ACT (bright green) status beforedownloading any other device. The RAM code downloadprocess for an GLI automatically downloads data and thenenables the GLI.NOTE 6
Download the BTS  – continued 6-38 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTVerify GLI ROM Code LoadsDevices should not be loaded with a RAM code version which is notcompatible with the ROM code with which they are loaded. Beforedownloading RAM code and data to the processor cards, follow theprocedure in Table 6-13 to verify the GLI devices are loaded with thecorrect ROM code for the software release used by the Base StationSystem.PrerequisiteIdentify the correct GLI ROM code load for the software release beingused on the BSS by referring to the Version Matrix section of the SCtCDMA Release Notes (supplied on the tapes or CD–ROMs containingthe BSS software).Table 6-13: Verify GLI ROM Code LoadsStep Action1If it has not already been done, start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS ( refer to Table 6-7).2Select all GLI devices by clicking on them, and select Device > Status from the BTS menu bar.3In the status report window which opens, note the number in the ROM Ver column for each GLI2.4If the ROM code loaded in the GLIs is not the correct one for the software release being used on theBSS, perform the following:4a – Log out of the BTS as described in Table 6-9 or Table 6-10, as applicable.4b – Disconnect the LMF computer.4c – Reconnect the span lines as described in Table 8-6.4d – Have the CBSC download the correct ROM code version to the BTS devices.5When the GLIs have the correct ROM load for the software release being used, be sure the span linesare disabled as outlined in Table 6-5 and proceed to downloading RAM code and data. 6
Download the BTS  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-39DRAFTDownload RAM Code and Datato GLIPrerequisitesSPrior to performing these procedures, ensure a code file exists for eachof the devices to be loaded.SThe LMF computer is connected to the BTS (refer to Table 6-6), andis logged in using the GUI environment (refer to Table 6-7).ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 6-14 to download the firmwareapplication code for GLI. The download code action downloads data andalso enables the GLI.Table 6-14: Download and Enable GLI DevicenStep Action1Note the active LAN to which the LMF computer is connected.2At the rear of the BTS, remove the 50–ohm termination from the LAN OUT connector of theLAN to which the LMF is not connected.3 Select Tools > Update Next Load > CDMA function to ensure the Next Load parameter is set tothe correct code version level.4Note the LAN IP address in the Network Login section of the LMF Login tab, and verify the WinLMF is logged into the following IP address:– GLI : 128.0.0.25Down load code to the GLI  by clicking on the GLI.– From the Device pull down menu, select Download > Code/DataA status report confirms change in the device status.– Click OK to close the status window. (The GLI should automatically be downloaded withdata and enabled.)6If the card accepts the download and enables, proceed to step 8.7If the BTS connection is lost during or after the download process, repeat step 4 and step 5 again.8Re–install the 50 ohm termination removed from the LAN connector in step 2. Download RAM Code and Datato Non–GLI DevicesDownloads to non–GLI devices can be performed individually for eachdevice or all installed devices can be downloaded with one action.6
Download the BTS  – continued 6-40 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTCSA devices are RAM code–loaded at the factory. RAMcode is downloaded to CSA only if a newer softwareversion needs to be loaded.When downloading to multiple devices, the download mayfail for some of the devices (a time–out occurs). Thesedevices can be loaded individually after completing themultiple download.NOTEFollow the steps in Table 6-15 to download RAM code and data tonon–GLI devices.Table 6-15: Download RAM Code and Data to Non–GLI DevicesnStep Action1Select the target CSA, MCC, and/or BBX device(s) by clicking on them.2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > Code/Data in the pull–down menus.– A status report is displayed that shows the results of the download for each selected device.3 Click OK to close the status report window when downloading is completed.NOTEAfter a BBX, CSA, or MCC device is successfully loaded with RAM code and data have changedto the OOS_RAM state (yellow), the status LED should be rapidly flashing GREEN.NOTEThe command in Step 2 loads both code and data. Data can be downloaded without doing a codedownload anytime a device is OOS–RAM using the command in Step 4.4To download just the firmware application data to each device, select the target device and select:Device>Download>Data Selecting CSA Clock Sourceand Enabling CSAsCSA must be enabled prior to enabling the MCCs. Procedures in thefollowing two sub-sections cover the actions to accomplish this. Foradditional information on the CSA sub–system, see “ClockSynchronization and Alarm (CSA) in the CSA System Time – GPS &HSO/MSO Verification section of this chapter.Select CSA Clock SourceA CSA can have three different clock sources. The CSA Source functioncan be used to select the clock source for each of the three inputs. Thisfunction is only used if the clock source for a CSA needs to be changed.The Clock Source function provides the following clock source options.SLocal GPSSRemote GPSSHSO/MSO6
Download the BTS  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-41DRAFTPrerequisitesSGLI is INS_ACT (bright green)SCSA is OOS_RAM (yellow) or INS_ACT (bright green)Follow the procedure in Table 6-16 to select a CSA Clock Source.Table 6-16: Select CSA Clock SourcenStep Action1Select the CSA for which the clock source is to be selected.2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select CSA > Select Clock Source... in the pull–downmenu list.– A CSA clock reference source selection window will appear.3Select the applicable clock source in the Clock Reference Source pick lists. Uncheck the relatedcheck boxes for Clock Reference Sources 2 and 3 if you do not want the displayed pick list item tobe used.4Click on the OK button.– A status report is displayed showing the results of the operation.5Click on the OK button to close the status report window. For Local GPS (RF–GPS), verify the CSA configured withthe GPS receiver “daughter board” is installed in the BTS’sCSA slot before continuing.NOTEEnable CSAFollow the steps outlined in Table 6-17 to enable the CSA.Table 6-17: Enable CSAnStep Action1Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select  Enable in the pull–down menu list.– A status report is displayed showing the  results of the enable operation.– Click OK to close the status report window.* IMPORTANT– The GPS satellite system satellites are not in a geosynchronous orbit and are maintained andoperated by the United States Department of Defense (DOD). The DOD periodically alterssatellite orbits; therefore, satellite trajectories are subject to change. A GPS receiver that is INScontains an “almanac” that is updated periodically to take these changes into account.– If a GPS receiver has not been updated for a number of weeks, it may take up to an hour for theGPS receiver “almanac” to be updated.– Once updated, the GPS receiver must track at least four satellites and obtain (hold) a 3–D positionfix for a minimum of 45 seconds before the CSA will come in service. (In some cases, the GPSreceiver needs to track only one satellite, depending on accuracy mode set during the data load).. . . continued on next page6
Download the BTS  – continued 6-42 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 6-17: Enable CSAnActionStepNOTE– After CSA have been successfully enabled, be sure the STA/ALM LED is steady green(alternating green/red indicates the card is in an alarm state).2If more than an hour has passed without the CSA enabling, refer to the CSA System Time – GPS &HSO/MSO Verification section of this chapter (see Table 6-19, Figure 6-11, and Table 6-20) todetermine the cause. Enable MCCsThis procedure configures the MCC and sets the “tx fine adjust”parameter. The “tx fine adjust” parameter is not a transmit gain setting,but a timing adjustment that compensates for the processing delay in theBTS (approximately 3 mS).Follow the steps in Table 6-18 to enable the MCCs installed in the CCP2shelf.The GLI and primary CSA must be downloaded andenabled (IN–SERVICE ACTIVE), prior to downloadingand enabling an MCC.NOTETable 6-18: Enable MCCsnStep Action1If the GLI/MCC/BBX view is not displayed in the LMF window, click on the GLI/MCC/BBX areaof the CCP2 shelf.2Click on the target MCC(s), or click on Select in the BTS menu bar, and select MCCs in thepull–down menu list.3Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable in the pull–down menu list.– A status report is displayed showing the  results of the enable operation.4 Click OK to close the status report window. 6
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO VerificationJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-43DRAFTClock Synchronization andAlarm (CSA) Sub–systemDescriptionOverviewThe primary function of the CSA card is to maintain CDMA systemtime. A GPS receiver provides the primary timing reference for allCDMA BTS’s During normal operation, the CSA clocking outputs arephase locked to the GPS receiver timing reference. The CSA supportseither an on–board GPS receiver module (RF GPS) or Remote GPS(RGPS) receiver. The RGPS receiver consists of a combined GPSreceiver and antenna witha digital interface to the CSA.Backup Timing ReferencesTiming signals from the High Stability Oscillator (HSO) or MediumStability Oscillator (MSO) are used in the event that the primary (GPS)reference should become unavailable.  The HSO or MSO clock iscalibrated against the GPS timing signal when a valid GPS timing signalis available to provide the longest possible backup timing performance.The CSA continuously monitors each available timing reference andutilizes the most suited reference to maintain system synchronization.Timing Source Fault ManagementFault management has the capability of switching between the GPSsynchronization source and the HSO/MSO backup source in the event ofa GPS receiver failure. During normal operation, the CSA selects GPS asthe primary timing source (Table 6-20). The source selection can also beoverridden via the WinLMF or by the system software.Front Panel LEDsThe status of the LEDs on the CSA boards are as follows:SSteady Green – CSA locked to GPS.SRapidly Flashing Green – Standby CSA locked to GPS.SFlashing Green/Rapidly Flashing Red – CSA OOS–RAM attemptingto lock on GPS signal.SRapidly Flashing Green and Red – Alarm condition exists. TroubleNotifications (TNs) are currently being reported to the GLI.6
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification  – continued 6-44 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTHigh Stability Oscillator /Medium Stability Oscillator(HSO/MSO)GeneralCSA and HSO/MSOThe CSA utilizes timing signals provided by either an HSO or MSO tomaintain BTS synchronization during the absence of valid GPS timinginformation. WHen a GPS timing signal is available the CSA isresponsible for calibration of the HSO or MSO clock to maximize thebackup timing interval. A minimum period of 24 hours of operation witha valid GPS reference is required to fully calibrate the HSO backupreference such that a 24 hour backup interval may be provided.HSOThe HSO is a free–running backup oscillator that is capable of providinga minimum backup interval of 24 hours.MSOThe MSO is a free–running backup oscillator that is capable of providinga minimum backup interval of 8 hours.NOTE Allow the base site and test equipment to warm up for 60minutes after any interruption in oscillator power. CSA cardwarm-up allows the oscillator oven temperature and oscillatorfrequency to stabilize prior to test. Test equipment warm-upallows the Rubidium standard time base to stabilize in frequencybefore any measurements are made.6
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-45DRAFTCSA Frequency VerificationThe objective of this procedure is the initial verification of the ClockSynchronization Alarms (CSA) Module before performing the RF pathverification tests.Test Equipment Setup (GPS & HSO/MSO Verification)Follow the steps outlined in Table 6-19 to set up test equipment.Table 6-19: Test Equipment Setup (GPS & HSO/MSO Verification)Step Action1Perform one of the following as required by installed equipment:1a – Verify a CSA card is installed in the CSA slot, and that the card is INS_ACT (bright green).2Connect a serial cable from the LMF COM 1 port (via null modem card) to the MMI port on the CSA(see Figure 6-11).3Start an MMI communication session with the CSA by using the Windows desktop shortcut icon (seeTable 6-11) .4When the terminal screen appears press the Enter key until the CSA> prompt appears.CAUTION If the RF GPS module is uesd to take care to ensure that the GPSantenna is properly connected to the GPS antenna connectorwithin the power entry compartment only. Damage to the GPSantenna and/or GPS receiver can result if the GPS antenna isinadvertently connected to any other RF connector. 6
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification  – continued 6-46 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 6-11: CSA MMI Terminal ConnectionNULL MODEMBOARD(TRN9666A)RS–232 SERIALMODEM CABLEDB9–TO–DB25ADAPTERCOM1LMFNOTEBOOKFW00372CSA card shownremoved from frameFREQ. MONITORSYNC MONITOR9–PIN TO 9–PINRS–232 CABLENOTES:1. One LED on each CSA:Green = IN–SERVICE ACTIVEFast Flashing Green = OOS–RAMRed = Fault ConditionFlashing Green & Red = FaultTO FRONTPANELGPS Initialization/VerificationPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding:SThe CSA and HSO/MSO (if equipped) has been warmed up for atleast 15 minutes.SThe LMF computer is connected to the MMI port of the CSA asshown in Figure 6-11.SAn MMI communication session has been started (Table 6-11), andthe CSA> prompt is present in the HyperTerminal window(Table 6-19).6
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-47DRAFTFollow the steps outlined in Table 6-20 to initialize and verify properGPS receiver functioning.Table 6-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action1To verify that Clock alarms (0000), Dpll is locked and has a reference source, andGPS self test passed messages are displayed within the report, issue the following MMIcommandbstatus– The system will display a response similar to the following:Clock Alarms (0000):DPLL is locked and has a reference source.GPS receiver self test result: passedTime since reset 0:33:11, time since power on: 0:33:112Enter the following command at the CSA> prompt to display the current status of the GPS receiver andHSO or MSO backup reference:sources– When equipped with HSO, the system will generate a response similar to the following:N Source Name Type TO Good Status Last Phase Target Phase Valid–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––0LocalGPS Primary 4 YES Good 00Yes1 HSO Backup 4 YES Good –2013177 –2013177 Yes2 Not Used*NOTE “Timed–out” should only be displayed while the HSO is warming up. If the HSO does notappear as one of the sources, then configure the HSO as a back–up source by entering the followingcommand at the CSA> prompt:ss 1 12The HSO or MSO must complete an initial warmup and calibration cycle before being usable as abackup reference source. The intial warmup cycle should be completed in less than 15 minutes. Duringthe warmup cycle, the HSO clock output is disabled and indicated as being “timed out” in thefollowing response to the “sources command:43:26:15 CSA>sources43:26:3543:26:35 N  Source Name    Type        TO   Good   Status  Last Phase   Target Phase  Valid43:26:35–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––43:26:35 0  Local GPS       Primary      59     Yes      Good          0                   0              Yes43:26:35 1  HSO                Backup     –25      No       Bad    timed out       unknown         No43:26:35 2  Not Used   43:26:35  Current reference source number: 0See 2–Cont.. . . continued on next page6
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification  – continued 6-48 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 6-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action2–Cont At the completion of the HSO warmup cycle, the HSO clcok output is enabled allowing califd clockpulses to be detected by the CSA. An integer value should then be displayed in the HSO “Last Phase”entry of the “sources” command as show below. If the HSO or MSO calibration cycle is not completedwithin 2 hours it will be necessary to inspect the HSO or MSO hardware.43:29:33 CSA>sources43:29:4343:29:43 N  Source Name    Type        TO   Good   Status  Last Phase   Target Phase  Valid43:29:43 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 43:29:43 0  Local GPS       Primary      59     Yes      Good          0                   0              Yes43:29:43 1  HSO                Backup          3     Yes       Bad    –xxxxxx       –xxxxxx         No43:29:43 2  Not Used   43:29:43  Current reference source number: 0The HSO or MSO calibration cycle can take as long as 2 hours to complete. The completion of theHSO or MSO calibration is indicated by a “yes” value in the valid column of the “sources” commandresponse as shown below. If the HSO or MSO calibration cycle is not complete within 2 hours it willbe necessary to inspect the HSO or MSO hardware.26:09:33 CSA>sources26:09:3526:09:35 N  Source Name    Type        TO   Good   Status  Last Phase   Target Phase  Valid26:09:35 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 26:09:35 0  Local GPS       Primary      59     Yes      Good          0                   0              Yes26:09:35 1  HSO                Backup          3     Yes       Bad    8683466       8683466        Yes26:09:35 2  Not Used   26:09:35  Current reference source number: 03HSO information (underlined text above, verified from left to right) is usually the #1 reference source.If this is not the case, have the OMC–R determine the correct BTS timing source has been identified inthe database by entering the display bts csmgen command and correct as required using the editcsm csmgen refsrc command.NOTEIf any of the above areas fail, verify:– Verify that HSO had been powered up for at least 15 minutes.– If “timed out” is displayed in the Last Phase column, suspect the HSO output buffer or oscillatoris defective– Verify the HSO is FULLY SEATED and LOCKED.4Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above):– GPS information is usually the 0 reference source.– At least one Primary source must indicate “Status = good” and “Valid = yes” to bring site up.. . . continued on next page6
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-49DRAFTTable 6-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action5Enter the following command at the CSA> prompt to verify that the GPS receiver is in tracking mode.gstatus– Observe the following typical response:27:27:11 CSA>gstatus27:27:14 GPS Receiver Control Task State: tracking satellites.27:27:14  Time since last valid fix: 0 seconds27:27:14  Frame type (0): master27:27:14  27:27:14  Recent Change Data:27:27:14  GPS time offset 0 ns.27:27:14  Initial position: lat 151679000 msec, lon: –316798000 msec, height 0 cm(GPS)27:27:14  Initial position accuracy (0): estimated.27:27:14  27:27:14  GPS Receiver Status27:27:14  Position hold: lat 151679326 msec, lon: –316798498 msec, hgt 21955 cm27:27:14  Current position: lat 151679326 msec, lon: –316798498 msec, hgt 21955 cm(GPS)27:27:14  8 satellites tracked, receiving 8 satellites, 8 satellites visible.27:27:14  Current Dilution of Precision (PDOP or HDOP): 027:27:14  Date & Time: 2004:03:16:21:37:48 LS:1327:27:14  GPS Receiver Status Byte:0x840027:27:14  Chan:0, SVID: 24, Mode: 8, RSSI: 42, Status: 0x08a127:27:14  Chan:1, SVID: 10, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0x08a027:27:14  Chan:2, SVID: ––, Mode: –, RSSI: –––, Status: 0x000027:27:14  Chan:3, SVID: 21, Mode: 8, RSSI: 48, Status: 0x08a127:27:14  Chan:4, SVID: 26, Mode: 8, RSSI:  50, Status: 0x08a027:27:14  Chan:5, SVID: 29, Mode: 8, RSSI: 48, Status: 0x08a027:27:14  Chan:6, SVID: 18, Mode: 8, RSSI: 42, Status: 0x08a027:27:14  Chan:7, SVID: 17, Mode: 8, RSSI: 50, Status: 0x08a027:27:14  Chan:8, SVID:  6, Mode: 8, RSSI: 49, Status: 0x08a027:27:14  Chan:9, SVID: ––, Mode: –, RSSI: –––, Status: 0x000027:27:14  Chan:10, SVID: ––, Mode: –, RSSI: –––, Status: 0x000027:27:14  Chan:11, SVID: ––, Mode: –, RSSI: –––, Status: 0x000027:27:146Verify the following GPS information (shown above in underlined text):– At least 4 satellites are tracked, and 4 satellites are visible.– GPS Receiver Control Task State is “tracking satellites”. Do not continue until this occurs!– Dilution of Precision indication is not more that 30.Record the current position base site latitude, longitude, height and height reference (height referenceto Mean Sea Level (MSL) or GPS height (GPS). (GPS = 0   MSL = 1).. . . continued on next page6
CSA System Time – GPS & HSO/MSO Verification  – continued 6-50 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 6-20: GPS Initialization/VerificationStep Action7If steps 1 through 6 pass, the GPS is good.NOTEIf any of the above mentioned areas fail, verify that:– If Initial position accuracy is “estimated” (typical), at least 4 satellites must be tracked andvisible (1 satellite must be tracked and visible if actual lat, log, and height data for this site hasbeen entered into CDF file).– If Initial position accuracy is “surveyed,” position data must be  of sufficient accuracy  orimproper GPS receiver timing may occur.– The GPS antenna is not obstructed or misaligned.– GPS antenna connector center conductor measureS approximately +5 Vdc with respect to theshield.– There is no more than 15 dB of loss between the GPS antenna OSX connector and the BTS frameGPS input.– Any lightning protection installed between GPS antenna and BTS frame is installed correctly.8Enter the following commands at the CSA> prompt to verify that the CSA is warmed up and that GPSacquisition has taken place.debug dpllp Observe the following typical response if the CSA is not warmed up (15 minutes from application ofpower) (If warmed–up proceed to step 9)CSA>DPLL Task Wait. 884 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 882 seconds left.DPLL Task Wait. 880 seconds left.   ...........etc.NOTEThe warm command can be issued at the MMI port used to force the CSA into warm–up, but thereference oscillator will be unstable.9Observe the following typical response if the CSA is warmed up.c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17486 off: –11, 3, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 3 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–2013175c:17470 off: –11, 1, 6 TK SRC:0 S0: 1 S1:–2013175,–201317510 Verify the following GPS information (underlined text above, from left to right):– Lower limit offset from tracked source variable is not less than –60 (equates to 3µs limit).– Upper limit offset from tracked source variable is not more than +60 (equates to 3µs limit).– TK SRC: 0 is selected, where SRC 0 = GPS.11 Enter the following commands at the CSA> prompt to exit the debug mode display.debug  dpllp 6
Test Equipment SetupJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-51DRAFTConnecting Test Equipment tothe BTSThe following types of test equipment are required to perform calibrationand ATP tests:SWinLMFSCommunications system analyzer model supported by the WinLMFSPower meter model supported by the WinLMF (required when usingthe HP 8921A/600 and Advantest R3465 analyzers)SNon–radiating transmit line termination loadSDirectional coupler and in–line attenuatorSRF cables and adaptersRefer to Table 6-21 for an overview of connections for test equipmentcurrently supported by the WinLMF. In addition, see the followingfigures:SFigure 6-15, Figure 6-17, and Figure 6-18 show the test setconnections for TX calibrationSFigure 6-19 through Figure 6-22 show the test set connections foroptimization/ATP testsTest Equipment GPIB AddressSettingsAll test equipment is controlled by the WinLMF through anIEEE–488/GPIB bus. To communicate on the bus, each piece of testequipment must have a GPIB address set which the WinLMF willrecognize. The standard address settings used by the WinLMF for thevarious types of test equipment items are as follows:SSignal generator address:  1SPower meter address:  13SCommunications system analyzer:  18Using the procedures included in the Verifying and Setting GPIBAddresses section of Appendix B, verify and, if necessary, change theGPIB address of each piece of employed test equipment to match theapplicable addresses above.Supported Test EquipmentCAUTION To prevent damage to the test equipment in high powerconfigurations, all transmit (TX) test connections must bethrough a 30 dB directional coupler plus a 20 dB in-lineattenuator for the 800 MHz BTSs.Attenuators are not required for low power configurations.IS–95A/B OperationOptimization and ATP testing for IS–95A/B sites or carriers may beperformed using the following test equipment:6
Test Equipment Setup  – continued 6-52 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTSCyberTest (High Power Configurations only)SAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generatorSAdvantest R3465 spectrum analyzer with R3561L signal generatorand HP–437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generatorSAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP8935)SHewlett–Packard HP 8921 (with CDMA interface and, for 1.9 GHz,PCS Interface) and HP–437B or Gigatronics Power MeterSSpectrum Analyzer (HP8594E) – optionalSRubidium Standard Timebase – optionalCDMA2000 1X OperationOptimization and ATP testing for CDMA2000 1X sites or carriers maybe performed using the following test equipment:SAdvantest R3267 spectrum analyzer with R3562 signal generatorSAgilent E4406A transmitter test set with E4432B signal generatorSAgilent 8935 series E6380A communications test set (formerly HP8935) with option 200 or R2K and with E4432B signal generator for1X FERSAgilent E7495A communications test setTest Equipment PreparationSee Appendix B for specific steps to prepare each type of test set andpower meter to perform calibration and ATP.Agilent E7495A communications test set requires additional setup andpreparation. This is described in detail in Appendix B.6
Test Equipment Setup  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-53DRAFTTest Equipment ConnectionChartsTo use the following charts to identify necessary test equipmentconnections, locate the communications system analyzer being used inthe COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER columns, and read downthe column. Where a dot appears in the column, connect one end of thetest cable to that connector. Follow the horizontal line to locate the endconnection(s), reading up the column to identify the appropriateequipment and/or BTS connector.IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment ConnectionsTable 6-21 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting IS–95A/B only which meetsMotorola standards and is supported by the WinLMF.Table 6-21: IS–95A/B–only Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNAL Cyber–Test AdvantestR3465 HP 8921A HP 8921W/PCS PowerMeter GPIBInterface WinLMFAttenuator&DirectionalCoupler BTSEVEN SECONDSYNCHRONIZATION EVENSEC REF EVEN SECSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC INEVENSECONDSYNC IN19.6608 MHZCLOCK TIMEBASE INCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCDMATIME BASEINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB GPIB SERIALPORTHP–IBHP–IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT INPUT50WTX1–6RFIN/OUT RFIN/OUT 20 DBATTEN. BTSPORTRX TESTCABLES RFGEN OUT RF OUT50WRX1–6DUPLEXOUT RF OUTONLYSYNCMON-ITORFREQMON-ITORHP–IB6
Test Equipment Setup  – continued 6-54 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTCDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B–capable Test EquipmentConnectionsTable 6-22 depicts the interconnection requirements for currentlyavailable test equipment supporting both CDMA 2000 1X andIS–95A/B which meets Motorola standards and is supported by theWinLMF.Table 6-22: CDMA2000 1X/IS–95A/B Test Equipment InterconnectionCOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER ADDITIONAL TEST EQUIPMENTSIGNALAgilent8935 (Op-tion 200 or R2K) AgilentE7495AAdvantestR3267 AgilentE4406AAgilentE4432BSignalGeneratorAdvant-estR3562SignalGenera-tor PowerMeterGPIBInter-face WinLMF30 dBDirectionalCoupler &20 dB Pad* BTSEVEN SECOND SYNCHRONIZATION EXTTRIG  IN EXT TRIG TRIGGER IN19.6608 MHZCLOCK MOD TIMEBASE IN EXT REFINCONTROLIEEE 488 BUS IEEE488 GPIB HP–IB GPIB SERIALPORTHP–IBTX TESTCABLES RFIN/OUT RF IN TX1–6RF INPUT50 OHM 30 DB COUPLERAND 20 DB PADRX TESTCABLES RF OUT50 OHMRF OUT50–OHM RX1–6RF OUTONLYSYNCMONITORFREQMONITORPATTERNTRIG  INGPIBRF OUTPUT50 OHMRF OUTPUT50–OHM10 MHZ IN 10 MHZ OUT(SWITCHED) 10 MHZ IN10 MHZOUT10 MHZSERIALI/O SERIALI/OSIGNAL SOURCECONTROLLEDSERIAL I/OEVENSECONDSYNC  INEXT REFINHP–IBRF IN/OUTDUPLEXOUT *SYNTHEREF IN*  WHEN USED ALONE, THE AGILENT 8935 WITH OPTION 200 OR R2K SUPPORTS IS–95A/B RX TESTING BUT NOT CDMA2000 1X RX TESTING.EVENSECONDSYNC  INPORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF IN6
Test Equipment Setup  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-55DRAFTEquipment Warm-upWarm-up BTS equipment for a minimum of 60 minutesprior to performing the BTS optimization procedure. Thisassures BTS stability and contributes to optimizationaccuracy.– Agilent E7495A for a minimum of 30 minutes– All other test sets for a minimum of 60 minutes– Time spent running initial or normal power-up,hardware/firmware audit, and BTS download countsas warm-up time.IMPORTANT*Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, verify there are no CDMA channelskeyed.– At active sites, have the OMC-R/CBSC place theantenna (sector) assigned to the BBX under test OOS.Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.WARNINGAutomatic Cable CalibrationSet–upFigure 6-21 and Figure 6-22 show the cable calibration setup for the testsets supported by the WinLMF. The left side of the diagram depicts thelocation of the input and output connectors of each test equipment item,and the right side details the connections for each test. Table 6-24provides a procedure for performing automatic cable calibration.Manual Cable CalibrationIf manual cable calibration is required, refer to the procedures inAppendix B.6
Test Equipment Setup  – continued 6-56 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTMotorola CyberTestAdvantest Model R3465RF OUT 50ΩINPUT 50ΩRF GEN OUTANT INSUPPORTED TEST SETS100–WATT  (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST CAL SETUPTESTSETC. TX TEST AND RX TEST CAL SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORCALIBRATION SET UPN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLESHORTCABLENote: The 30 dB directional coupler is not usedwith the Cybertest test set. The TX cable isconnected directly to the Cybertest test set.A 10dB attenuator must be used with the short testcable for cable calibration with the CyberTest testset. The 10dB attenuator is used only for the cablecalibration procedure, not with the test cables forTX calibration and ATP tests.TESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)N–N FEMALEADAPTER50 ΩΤERM.Figure 6-12: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –Agilent E4406A/E4432B and Advantest R3267/R3562Agilent 8935 Series E6380A(formerly HP 8935)RFIN/OUTANTINHewlett Packard Model HP 8921ANote: For 800 MHZ only. The HP8921A cannotbe used to calibrate cables for PCS frequencies.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATIONDUPLEXOUT ANTIN6
Test Equipment Setup  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-57DRAFTTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLECALIBRATION SET UP100–WATT  (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADD. RX and TX TEST SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)50 ΩΤERM.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATION10 DB PAD10 DB PADSHORTCABLE10 DB PAD10 DB PADTESTSETSUPPORTED TEST SETSAgilent  E7495APORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF INUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InFigure 6-13: CDMA2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup –  Agilent E7495A6
Test Equipment Setup  – continued 6-58 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTESTSETA. SHORT CABLE CALSHORTCABLEB. RX TEST SETUPCALIBRATION SET UPTESTSETRXCABLESHORTCABLEN–N FEMALEADAPTERFigure 6-14: IS–95A/B and CDMA 2000 1X Cable Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E4406A/E4432Band Advantest R3267/R3562SUPPORTED TEST SETSINPUT 50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ OUT ON REAR OF SPECTRUMANALYZERAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER(FIGURE B-18).RF INPUT50 ΩRF OUTPUT50 Ω100–WATT  (MIN)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTESTSETD. TX TEST SETUP AND RX TEST SETUP20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORN–N FEMALEADAPTERTXCABLESHORTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER (30 DB)50 ΩΤERM.TX CABLE FORTX TEST CABLECALIBRATIONRX CABLE FORDRDC RX TESTCABLE CALIBRATION6
Test Equipment Setup  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-59DRAFTSet-up for TX CalibrationFigure 6-15 and Figure 6-17 show the test set connections for TXcalibration.Figure 6-15: TX Calibration Test Setup –CyberTest (IS–95A/B) and Agilent 8935 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)Motorola CyberTestAgilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPFRONT PANEL RFIN/OUTRFIN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXNOTE: THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER IS NOTUSED WITH THE CYBERTEST TEST SET. THE TXCABLE IS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THECYBERTEST TEST SET.RS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXGPIBCABLERS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSCDMWinLMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGSLANBLANAGPIBRF IN/OUTFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSACommunicationsSystem Analyzer0–20 DBIN–LINEATTENUATOR50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESPower Meter(OPTIONAL)*POWERSENSOR* A POWER METER CAN BE USED INPLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONSTEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/AUDITNOTE:TO PERFORM LOW POWER CALIBRATIONTHE POWER METER IS ADEQUATE FORMEASUREMENT PURPOSES WITHOUTUSING THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLERAND 0–20 DB ATTENUATOR.IF THE AGILENT 8935 MUST BE USED,THEN CONNECT TO THE ANT IN PORT.ANTINcCLPAANTENNACONNECTORTX INCONNECTORRX OUTCONNECTORTX 1RX DIVLOW POWERCONNECTIONHIGH POWERCONNECTION6
Test Equipment Setup  – continued 6-60 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPBTS CDMAWinLMF10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANARX DIVSYNCMONITORCSATX 150 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLENOTE:  IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DUPLEXED RX/TXSIGNALS, CONNECT THE TXTEST CABLE TO THEDUPLEXED ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERSENSOR2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORETHERNET HUBUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE  (RJ45 CONNECTORS)Agilent  E7495APORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF INSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InINTERNALETHERNETCARDCOMMUNICATIONSsystem analyzerPOWER METERPORT 2RF INPORT 1RF OUTFREQMONITORFigure 6-16: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E7495A (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)ANTENNACONNECTORRX OUTCONNECTORTX INCONNECTORHIGH POWERCONNECTIONLOW POWERCONNECTION6
Test Equipment Setup  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-61DRAFTTEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPNOTE: THE HP8921A AND ADVANTEST R3465CANNOT BE USED FOR TX CALIBRATION. APOWER METER MUST BE USED.RS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXGPIBCABLERS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSCDMAWinLMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGSLANBLANAFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSA50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESPOWERSENSOR Power  Meter0–20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORNOTE:TO PERFORM LOW POWER CALIBRATIONTHE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 0–20 DB ATTENUATOR ARE NOT REQUIRED.ANTINHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)NOTE:TO PERFORM LOW POWER CALIBRATIONUSING THE HP8921A, CONNECT TO THEANT IN PORT. THE 30 DB DIRECTIONALCOUPLER AND 0–20 DB ATTENUATOR ARENOT REQUIRED.cCLPAANTENNACONNECTORTX INCONNECTORRX OUTCONNECTORTX 1RX DIVLOW POWERCONNECTIONHIGH POWERCONNECTIONFigure 6-17: TX Calibration Test Setup – Using Power Meter6
Test Equipment Setup  – continued 6-62 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 6-18: TX Calibration Test Setup – Agilent E4406A and Advantest R3567 (IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X)TEST SETS TRANSMIT (TX) SET UPRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXGPIBCABLERS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSCDMAWinLMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGSLANBLANAGPIBRF INPUT 50 ΩOR INPUT 50 ΩFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSACommunicationsSystemAanalyzer50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESNOTE:  IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXEDRX/TX SIGNALS), CONNECTTHE TX TEST CABLE TOTHE DRDC ANTENNACONNECTOR.POWERMETER(OPTIONAL)*POWERSENSOR* A POWER METER CAN BE USED INPLACE OF THE COMMUNICATIONSTEST SET FOR TX CALIBRATION/AUDITRF INPUT50 ΩAgilent E4406AINPUT 50 ΩAdvantest R32670–20 DBIN–LINEATTENUATORNOTE:TO PERFORM LOW POWER CALIBRATION THE POWERMETER IS ADEQUATE FOR MEASUREMENT PURPOSESWITHOUT USING THE 30 DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND0–20 DB ATTENUATOR.cCLPAANTENNACONNECTORTX INCONNECTORRX OUTCONNECTORTX 1RX DIVHIGH POWERCONNECTIONLOW POWERCONNECTION TOEITHER THEPOWER METEROR ANALYZER6
Test Equipment Setup  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-63DRAFTSet–up for ATP Figure 6-19 and Figure 6-20 show the test set connections for ATP tests.Figure 6-19: IS–95A/B ATP Test Set–up– CyberTest, Advantest R3465, and Agilent 8935Motorola CyberTestTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSA CARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSA CARDAdvantest Model R3465INPUT 50ΩGPIB CONNECTSTO BACK OF UNITNOTE: The 30 dB directional coupler is notused with the Cybertest test set. The TXcable is connected directly to the Cybertesttest set.RF OUT 50ΩFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSA CARDRF GENOUTSYNC MONITOR EVENSEC TICK PULSEREFERENCE FROM CSACARDBNC“T”TO EXT TRIGGER CONNECTORON REAR OF TEST SET(FOR DETAILS, SEEFIGURE B-15)RS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXGPIBCABLERS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTS CDMAWinLMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGSLANBLANARX TESTCABLEGPIBRF IN/OUTORINPUT 50 ΩRF GEN OUT,RF OUT 50Ω,OR RF IN/OUTFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSA50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESEXTREF INEVENSECOND/SYNC INNOTE:  IF BTS IS EQUIPPEDWITH DRDCS (DUPLEXED RX/TXSIGNALS), BOTH THE TX AND RXTEST CABLES CONNECT TO THEDRDC ANTENNA CONNECTOR.(SEE FIGURE 6-22.)0–20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORIMPORTANT:WHEN PERFORMING LOW POWER TESTING BYPASS THE COUPLER ANDATTENUATOR AND CONNECT DIRECTLY TO THE ANALYZER.Agilent 8935 Series E6380A (formerly HP 8935)RF IN/OUTHP–IBTO GPIBBOXSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSA CARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSA CARD10 MHZREF OUTCommunicationsSystem AnalyzerANTINcCLPAANTENNATX INRX OUTRX MAINRX DIV TX1HIGH POWERCONNECTION6
Test Equipment Setup  – continued 6-64 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 6-20: IS–95A/B ATP Test Setup – HP 8921ARF OUTONLYHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A W/PCS Interface(for  1900 MHz)GPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSA CARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSA CARDTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPRFIN/OUTGPIBCONNECTSTO BACK OFUNITSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSA CARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSA CARDHewlett Packard Model HP 8921A(for 800 MHz)RFIN/OUTDUPLEXOUTRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXGPIBCABLERS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTS CDMAWinLMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGSLANBLANARX TESTCABLEGPIBPCS INTERFACEINPUT/OUTPUTPORTSFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSA50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESEXTREF IN EVENSECOND/SYNC INHP PCSINTERFACE*0–20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATOR* FOR 1900 MHZONLYRF OUT ONLYRF IN/OUTNOTE:FOR 800 MHZ TESTING, CONNECT CABLES TO THEHP 8921A AS FOLLOWS:RX TEST CABLE TO DUPLEX OUTTX TEST CABLE TO RF IN/OUTCommunicationsSystem AnalyzerANTINcCLPAANTENNATX INRX OUTRX MAINRX DIV TX1SignalGenerator6
Test Equipment Setup  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-65DRAFTTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPFigure 6-21: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X ATP Test Setup Agilent Test EquipmentRF INPUT50 ΩRFOUTPUT50 ΩAgilent E4432B (Top) and E4406A (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSA CARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSA CARDBNC“T”TO TRIGGER INON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTERTO PATTERN TRIG INON REAR OF SIGNALGENERATORTO EXT REF IN ON REAR OFTRANSMITTERTESTER NOTE:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ OUT (SWITCHED) ON REAR OF TRANSMITTER TESTER(SEE FIGURE B-18).RS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXGPIBCABLERS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSCDMALMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGS *LANBLANACommunicationsSystem AnalyzerHP–IBORGPIBFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSMBTSCPLDANTENNASignalGeneratorGPIB10 MHZIN10 MHZREF OUTOR10 MHZOUTTRIGGER INOREVEN SECSYNCH INEXTREFINBNC“T”PATTERNTRIG IN* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESRX TESTCABLE50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORRF IN/OUTORRF INPUT50 ΩRF OUTPUT 50 ΩAgilent  E4432B (Top) and 8935 Series E6380A(Bottom)SYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSA CARDFREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSA CARDRFOUTPUT50 ΩNOTES:10 MHZ IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO10 MHZ REF OUT ON SIDE OF CDMA BASE STATION TEST SET PATTERN TRIG IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO EVEN SECOND SYNC IN ON SIDE OF CDMA BASESTATION TEST SET.(SEE FIGURE B-17)RF IN/OUTBNC“T”RX OUT TX INcCLPARX MAIN TX16
Test Equipment Setup  – continued 6-66 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 6-22: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup – Agilent E4432B/8935 SeriesE6380A and E4432B/E4406A Test EquipmentTEST SETS Optimization/ATP SET UPINPUT 50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩAdvantest R3267 (Top) and R3562 (Bottom)FREQ MONITOR19.6608 MHZ CLOCKREFERENCE FROMCSA CARDSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSA CARDBNC“T”NOTE:SYNTHE REF IN ON REAR OF SIGNAL GENERATOR ISCONNECTED TO 10 MHZ REF OUT ON REAR OFSPECTRUM ANALYZER (SEE FIGURE B-19)TO EXT TRIG ON REAR OFSPECTRUMANALYZERRS232–GPIBINTERFACE BOXGPIBCABLERS232 NULLMODEMCABLES MODEDATA FORMATBAUD RATEGPIB ADRS G MODEONBTSCDMAWinLMFDIP SWITCH SETTINGSLANBLANAINPUT50 ΩRF OUT50 ΩFREQMONITORSYNCMONITORCSABNC“T”GPIBGPIBSYNTHEREFIN10 MHZOUTEXTTRIG INMOD TIMEBASE INEXT TRIG* BLACK RECTANGLESREPRESENT THE RAISEDPART OF SWITCHESRX TESTCABLE50 ΩTERM.TX TESTCABLEDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOADTX TESTCABLE0–20 DB IN–LINEATTENUATORSpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorcCLPAANTENNATX INRX OUTTX 1RX MAIN6
Test Equipment Setup  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-67DRAFTTEST SET ATP TEST SET UPUNIVERSAL TWISTED PAIR (UTP)CABLE  (RJ45 CONNECTORS)CDMAWinLMFINTERNALETHERNETCARDRF INPUT 50 ΩOR INPUT 50 Ω50 ΩTERMDIRECTIONALCOUPLER(30 DB)100–WATT (MIN.)NON–RADIATINGRF LOAD TX TEST2O DB IN–LINEATTENUATORETHERNET HUBRX TESTRX MAIN TX 1TESTCABLESNOTE:  USE THE SAMECABLE SET FOR TX AND RXATP. SWITCH THE CABLESDURING ALL ATP TESTS ASSHOWN.POWER METERPORT 2RF INPORT 1RF OUTAgilent  E7495APORT 1RF OUTPORT 2RF INSYNC MONITOREVEN SEC TICKPULSE REFERENCEFROM CSM BOARDUse onlyAgilent suppliedpower adapterGPSGPIOSerial 1Serial 2Power REF50 MHzSensorExt RefInEven SecondSync InAntennaPort 1RF Out / SWRPort 2RF InEVEN SECONDSYNC INBTS10BASET/10BASE2CONVERTERLANBLANASYNCMONITORCSAFREQMONITORFigure 6-23: IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X Optimization/ATP Test Setup – Agilent E7495AcCLPATX INRX OUTANTENNACommunicationsSystem Analyzer6
Test Set Calibration 6-68 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTBackgroundProper test equipment calibration helps to ensure accurate BTSoptimization and acceptance testing by assuring that the test equipmentand associated cables do not introduce measurement errors.If the test equipment set being used to optimize or test theBTS has been calibrated and maintained as a set, thisprocedure does not need to be performed.NOTEThis procedure must be performed prior to beginning the optimization.Verify all test equipment (including all associated cables and adaptersactually used to interconnect test equipment items and the BTS) has beencalibrated and maintained as a set.If any piece of test equipment, test cable, or RF adapterthat makes up the calibrated test equipment set has beenreplaced, the set must be re-calibrated. Failure to do so canintroduce measurement errors, resulting in incorrectmeasurements and degradation to system performance.Motorola recommends repeating cable calibration beforetesting at each BTS site.CAUTIONCalibration of the communications system analyzer (orequivalent test equipment) must be performed at the sitebefore calibrating the overall test equipment set. Calibratethe test equipment after it has been allowed to warm–upand stabilize for a a minimum of 60 minutes.NOTECalibration ProceduresIncludedAutomaticProcedures included in this section use the WinLMF automatedcalibration routine to determine path losses of the supportedcommunications analyzer, power meter, associated test cables, adapters,and (if used) antenna switch that make up the overall calibrated testequipment set. After calibration, the gain/loss offset values are stored ina test measurement offset file on the WinLMF computer.6
Test Set Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-69DRAFTManualAgilent E4406A Transmitter Tester – The E4406A does not supportthe power level zeroing calibration performed by the WinLMF. If thisinstrument is to be used for Bay Level Offset calibration and calibrationis attempted with the WinLMF Calibrate Test Equipment function, theWinLMF will return a status window failure message stating that zeroingpower is not supported by the E4406A. Refer to the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix B for instructions on using theinstrument’s self–alignment (calibration) function prior to performingBay Level Offset calibration.Power Meters – Manual power meter calibration procedures to beperformed prior to automated calibration are included in the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix B .Cable Calibration – Manual cable calibration procedures using the HP8921A and Advantest R3465 communications system analyzers areprovided in the Manual Cable Calibration section of Appendix B, ifneeded.GPIB AddressesGPIB addresses can range from 1 through 30. The WinLMF will acceptany address in that range, but the numbers entered in the WinLMFOptions window GPIB address boxes (Table 6-23 and Table 6-24) mustmatch the addresses set in the test equipment. Motorola recommendsusing 1 for a CDMA signal generator, 13 for a power meter, and 18 for acommunications system analyzer. To verify and, if necessary, change theGPIB addresses of the test equipment, refer to the Setting GPIBAddresses section of Appendix B.Selecting Test EquipmentSerial Connection and Network Connection tabs are provided in theWinLMF Options window to specify the test equipment connectionmethod. The Serial Connection tab is used when the test equipmentitems are connected directly to the WinLMF computer through a GPIBbox (normal setup). The Network Connection tab is used when the testequipment is to be connected remotely via a network connection or theAgilent E7495A Communications Test Set is used.PrerequisitesBe sure the following have been completed before selecting testequipment:STest equipment is correctly connected and turned on.SGPIB addresses set in the test equipment have been verified as correctusing the applicable procedures in Appendix B.SWinLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to theGPIB box.6
Test Set Calibration  – continued 6-70 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTSelecting Test EquipmentTest equipment may be selected either manually with operator input orautomatically using the WinLMF autodetect feature.Manually Selecting TestEquipment in a SerialConnection TabTest equipment can be manually specified before or after the testequipment is connected. The WinLMF does not attempt to verify the testequipment is actually detected when manual selection is specified.Follow the procedure in Table 6-23 to manually select test equipment.Table 6-23: Procedure for Selecting Test Equipment Manually in the Serial Connection TabStep Action1In the WinLMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu.The WinLMF Options window appears.2If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port: pick list (normally COM1).4If it is not selected (black dot showing), click on the Manual Specification button.5Click on the check box(es) corresponding to the test equipment item(s) to be used.6Type the GPIB address in the corresponding GPIB address box (refer to the Setting GPIB Addressessection of Appendix B for directions on verifying and/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses).Motorola–recommended addresses are:1 = signal generator13 = power meter18 = communications system analyzer* IMPORTANTWhen test equipment items are manually selected by the operator, the WinLMF defaults to using apower meter for RF power measurements. The WinLMF will use a communications system analyzerfor RF power measurements only if a power meter is not selected (power meter checkbox notchecked).7Click on Apply. (The button will darken until the selection has been committed.)NOTEWith manual selection, the WinLMF does not attempt to detect the test equipment to verify it isconnected and communicating with the WinLMF.To verify and, if necessary, change the GPIB address of the test equipment, refer to Appendix B.8Click on Dismiss to close the WinLMF Options window. 6
Test Set Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-71DRAFTAutomatically Selecting TestEquipment in the SerialConnection Tab When using the auto-detection feature to select test equipment, theWinLMF determines which test equipment items are actuallycommunicating with WinLMF. Follow the procedure in Table 6-24 touse the auto-detection feature.Table 6-24: Procedure for Selecting Test Equipment Using Auto-DetectStep Action1In the WinLMF window menu bar, click Tools and select Options... from the pull–down menu. TheWinLMF Options window appears.2If it is not in the forefront, click on the Serial Connection tab.3Select the correct serial port in the COMM Port: pick list (normally COM1).4If it is not selected (no black dot showing), click on the Auto–Detection button.5If they are not already displayed in the box labeled GPIB address to search, click in the box and typein the GPIB addresses for the test equipment to be used, separating each address with commas and nospaces. (Refer to the Setting GPIB Addresses section of Appendix B for instructions on verifyingand/or changing test equipment GPIB addresses.)NOTEDuring the GPIB address search for a test equipment item to perform RF power measurements (that is,for TX calibration), the WinLMF will select the first item it finds with the capability to perform themeasurement. If, for example, the address sequence 13,18,1 is included in the GPIB addresses tosearch box, the power meter (GPIB address 13) will be used for RF power measurements. If theaddress sequence 18,13,1 is included, the WinLMF will use the communications system analyzer(GPIB address 18) for power measurements.6 Click Apply. The button will darken until the selection has been committed. A check mark will appearin the applicable Manual Configuration section check boxes for detected test equipment items.7 Click Dismiss to close the WinLMF Options window.  Calibrating Test EquipmentThe WinLMF Calibrate Test Equipment function zeros the powermeasurement level of the test equipment item that is to be used for TXcalibration and audit. If both a power meter and an analyzer areconnected (for example, an HP 437 and an HP8921A/600), only thepower meter is zeroed.The Agilent E4406A transmitter tester does not supportpower measurement level zeroing. Refer to the EquipmentCalibration section of Appendix B for E4406A calibration.NOTE6
Test Set Calibration  – continued 6-72 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTPrerequisitesSWinLMF computer serial port and test equipment are connected to theGPIB box.STest equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60minutes.STest equipment has been selected in the WinLMF (Table 6-23 orTable 6-24)Follow the procedure in Table 6-25 to calibrate the test equipment.Table 6-25: Procedure for Test Equipment CalibrationStep Action1From the Util menu, select Calibrate Test Equipment from the pull–down menu. A Directionswindow is displayed.2Follow the directions provided.3Click on Continue to close the Directions window and start the calibration process. A status reportwindow is displayed.4Click on OK to close the status report window.  Calibrating Cables OverviewThe WinLMF Cable Calibration function is used to measure the pathloss (in dB) for the TX and RX cables, adapters, directional couplers,and attenuators that make up the cable configurations used for testing. Acommunications system analyzer is used to measure the loss of both theTX test cable and the RX test cable configurations. WinLMF cablecalibration consists of the following processes:1. Measure the loss of a short cable. This is done to compensate for anymeasurement error of the communications system analyzer. Theshort cable, which is used only for the calibration process, isconnected in series with both the TX and RX test cableconfigurations when they are measured. The measured loss of theshort cable is deducted from the measured loss of the TX and RXtest cable configurations to determine the actual loss of theconfigurations. This deduction is done so any error in the analyzermeasurement will be adjusted out of both the TX and RXmeasurements.2. Measure the loss of the short cable plus the RX test cableconfiguration. The RX test cable configuration normally consistsonly of a coax cable with type–N connectors that is long enough toreach from the BTS RX connector to the test equipment. When theBTS antenna connectors carry duplexed TX and RX signals, adirectional coupler and, if required by BTS type, an additionalattenuator are also required for the RX test cable configuration.These additional items must be included in the path lossmeasurement.6
Test Set Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-73DRAFT3. Measure the loss of the short cable plus the TX test cableconfiguration. The TX test cable configuration normally consists oftwo coax cables with type–N connectors, a directional coupler, atermination load with sufficient rating to dissipate the BTS outputpower, and an additional attenuator, if required by the BTS type. Thetotal path loss of the TX test configuration must be as required forthe BTS (normally 30 or 50 dB). The Motorola Cybertest analyzer isdifferent from other communications system analyzers because therequired attenuation/load is built into the test set. Because of this,the Cybertest TX test configuration consists only of the requiredlength coax cable.Calibrating Test CableConfigurations with aCommunications SystemAnalyzerCable Calibration is used to calibrate both TX and RX test cables.WinLMF cable calibration cannot be accomplished with anHP8921A analyzer for 1.9 GHz. A different analyzer typeor the signal generator and spectrum analyzer method(Table 6-27 and Table 6-28) must be used. Cablecalibration values must be manually entered into theWinLMF cable loss file if the signal generator andspectrum analyzer method is used. To use the HP8921A formanual test cable configuration calibration for 800 MHzBTSs, refer to the Manual Cable Calibration section ofAppendix B.NOTEPrerequisitesSTest equipment is turned on and has warmed up for at least 60minutes. Agilent E7495A requires only 30 minute warmup.STest equipment has been selected in the WinLMF (Table 6-23 orTable 6-24).STest equipment has been calibrated and correctly connected for thetype of test cable configuration to be  calibrated.Calibrating cablesRefer to Figure 6-21 or Figure 6-22 and follow the procedure inTable 6-26 to calibrate the test cable configurations.Table 6-26: Procedure to Test Cabling Calibration using Communication System AnalyzernStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Cable Calibration... in the pull–down menu. A CableCalibration window is displayed.. . . continued on next page6
Test Set Calibration  – continued 6-74 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 6-26: Procedure to Test Cabling Calibration using Communication System AnalyzernActionStep2Enter one or more channel numbers in the Channels box.NOTEMultiple channel numbers must be separated by a comma with no spaces (for example: 200,800).When two or more channel numbers are entered, the cables will be calibrated for each channel.Interpolation will be accomplished for other channels, as required, for TX calibration.3 Select TX and RX CABLE CAL, TX CABLE CAL or RX CABLE CAL in the CableCalibration picklist.4 Click OK, and follow the directions displayed for each step. A status report window will bedisplayed with the results of the cable calibration. Calibrate Test Cabling UsingSignal Generator & SpectrumAnalyzerRefer to Figure 6-24 and follow the procedure in Table 6-27 to calibratethe TX test cable configuration for all BTSs or the RX ATP test cableconfiguration for BTSs with duplexed TX/RX using the signal generatorand spectrum analyzer. Refer to Figure 6-25 and follow the procedure inTable 6-28 to calibrate the test cable configuration for  non–duplexed RXusing the signal generator and spectrum analyzer.Table 6-27: Procedure to Calibrate TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerStep Action1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown inFigure 6-24, detail “A” (top portion of figure).2Set signal generator to 0 dBm at the customer frequency of:869–894 MHz or 1930–1990 MHz3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 6-24, A) and  record the value.4Connect the spectrum analyzer’s short cable to point B, (as shown in the lower right portion of thediagram) to measure cable output at customer frequency of:869–894 MHz or 1930–1990 MHzRecord the value at point B.5Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)Example:  Cal factor = –1 dBm – (–53.5 dBm) = 52.5 dBNOTEThe short cable is used for calibration only. It is not part of the final test setup. After calibration iscompleted, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configuration as is to ensure testprocedures use the correct calibration factor. 6
Test Set Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-75DRAFTFigure 6-24: Cal Setup for TX/Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum Analyzer50 OHMTERMINATION30 DBDIRECTIONALCOUPLERSpectrumAnalyzerSignal GeneratorASpectrumAnalyzer40W NON–RADIATINGRF LOADBSHORT TEST CABLESignal GeneratorTHIS WILL CONNECT TO THE POWER METER OR COMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER DURING TX CALIBRATION AND TO THECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ANALYZER DURING TX AND RX ATP TESTS.SHORTTESTCABLE20DB 20 W IN–LINEATTENUATOR FOR1.9 GHZTHIS WILL CONNECT TO THE BTS TXANTENNA CONNECTOR DURING TXCALIBRATION AND TO THE TX/RX ANTENNACONNECTORS DURING ATP TESTS.TX TESTCABLERX TEST CABLE FOR RX ATP TESTOR SECOND TX TEST CABLE FOR TX CAL AND ATPTable 6-28: Procedure for Calibrating Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerStep ActionNOTEWhen preparing to calibrate a BTS with Duplexed TX and RX the RX cable calibration must be doneusing calibration setup in Figure 6-24 and the procedure in Table 6-27.1Connect a short test cable between the spectrum analyzer and the signal generator as shown inFigure 6-25, detail “A” (top portion of figure).2Set signal generator to –10 dBm at the customer’s RX frequency of:824–849 for North American Cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCS3Use spectrum analyzer to measure signal generator output (see Figure 6-25, A) and record the value.4Connect the test setup, as shown in the lower portion of the diagram (see Figure 6-25, B) to measurethe output at the customer’s RX frequency of:824–849 for North American Cellular or 1850–1910 MHz band for North American PCSRecord the value at point B.5Calibration factor = (value measured with detail “A” setup) – (value measured with detail “B” setup)Example:  Cal factor = –12 dBm – (–14 dBm) = 2 dBNOTEThe short test cable is used for test equipment setup calibration only. It is not part of the final testsetup. After calibration is completed, do not re-arrange any cables. Use the test cable configurationas–is to ensure test procedures use the correct calibration factor. 6
Test Set Calibration  – continued 6-76 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 6-25:  Cal Setup for Non–Duplexed RX Test Cabling Using Signal Generator & Spectrum AnalyzerSpectrumAnalyzerSignalGeneratorABSpectrumAnalyzerSHORTTESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE COMMUNICATIONSSYSTEM ANALYZER RF OUTPUTCONNECTOR DURING RX MEASUREMENTSSignalGeneratorBULLETCONNECTORTX testcableSHORT TESTCABLECONNECTION TO THE BTS RX ANTENNACONNECTOR DURING RX ATPIMPORTANT:  IF BTS TX/RX SIGNALS AREDUPLEXED, THE RX TEST CABLE CONNECTSTO THE DUPLEXED ANTENNA CONNECTORAND MUST USE/BE CALIBRATED WITH THE 30DB DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND 20 DBIN–LINE ATTENUATOR. SEE FIGURE 6-24.Setting Cable Loss Values Cable loss values for TX and RX test cable configurations are normallyset by accomplishing automatic cable calibration using the WinLMF andthe applicable test equipment. The WinLMF stores the measured lossvalues in the cable loss files. The cable loss values can also be set orchanged manually. Follow the procedure in Table 6-29 to set cable lossvalues.CAUTION If cable calibration was performed without using the WinLMF,cable loss values must be manually entered in the WinLMFdatabase. Failure to do this will result in inaccurate BTScalibration and reduced site performance.PrerequisitesSWinLMF is logged into the BTSTable 6-29: Procedure for Setting Cable Loss ValuesStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Cable Loss in the pull–down menus.–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2Click on the TX Cable Loss tab or the RX Cable Loss tab, as required.3To add a new channel number, perform the following:3a – Click on the Add Row button.3b – Click in the Channel # or Loss (dBm) column, as required.3c – Enter the desired value.. . . continued on next page6
Test Set Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-77DRAFTTable 6-29: Procedure for Setting Cable Loss ValuesStep Action4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5To delete a row, click on the row and then click on the Delete Row button.6For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.7Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button was used will be lost when the window isdismissed.SIf cable loss values exist for two different channels the WinLMF will interpolate for all otherchannels.SEntered values will be used by the WinLMF as soon as they are saved. It is not necessary to log outand log back into the WinLMF for changes to take effect. Setting TX and RX DirectionalCoupler Loss ValueIf an in–service TX or RX directional coupler is installed in the RF path,the loss due to the added coupler (e.g., 30 dB) must be manually enteredso it will be included in the WinLMF TX calibration and auditcalculations and the RX FER test. Follow the procedure in Table 6-30 toenter directional coupler loss values.PrerequisitesSWinLMF is logged into the BTSSPath loss, in dB, of the TX coupler must be known.Table 6-30: Procedure for Setting TX and RX Directional Coupler Loss ValuesStep Action1 Click Util in the BTS menu bar, and select Edit > Coupler Loss... in the pull–down menus.–A tabbed data entry pop–up window will appear.2Click on the TX Coupler Loss tab or the RX Coupler Loss tab, as required3Click in the Loss (dBm) column for each carrier that has a coupler and enter the appropriate value.4To edit existing values, click in the data box to be changed and change the value.5For each tab with changes, click on the Save button to save displayed values.. . . continued on next page6
Test Set Calibration  – continued 6-78 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 6-30: Procedure for Setting TX and RX Directional Coupler Loss ValuesStep Action6Click on the Dismiss button to close the window.NOTESValues entered or changed after the Save button is used will be lost when the window is dismissed.SThe In–Service Calibration check box in the Tools > Options > BTS Options tab must bechecked before entered TX coupler loss values will be used by the TX calibration and auditfunctions.SNew or changed values will be used by the LMF as soon as they are saved. Logging out and loggingin again are not required to cause saved changes to take effect. 6
Bay Level Offset CalibrationJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-79DRAFTPurpose of Bay Level OffsetCalibrationBay Level Offset (BLO) calibration is the central activity of theoptimization process. BLO calibration compensates for normalequipment variations within the BTS RF paths and assures the correcttransmit power is available at the BTS antenna connectors to meet siteperformance requirements.What is BLO Calibration?DescriptionBLO calibration is the complete title of what is normally referred to as“calibration.” Calibration identifies the accumulated gain in everytransmit path at the BTS site. The transmit path BLO values determinedduring calibration are stored in the LMF calibration data file, and aresubsequently downloaded to each BBX. When transmit path calibrationis performed, receive path BLO values will automatically be set to thedefault value in the LMF calibration file and downloaded.Component Verification DuringCalibrationTX Path CalibrationTX path calibration supports verification of correct BTS installation, RFcabling installation and performance, functionality of all equipmentinstalled in the transmit RF chain, and the proper functioning of eachtransmit RF path. External test equipment is used to calibrate and auditthe TX paths of the BTS.RX Path CalibrationRX path calibration is not required or supported on CDMA BTSsystems. Default RX calibration values are written to the RX calibrationdata files during the TX calibration process. RX functionality is verifiedduring Frame Erasure Rate (FER) testing.When to Calibrate BLOs Calibration to determine BLO:1. Is required after initial BTS installation.2. Must be done once each year for an operational BTS site.3. Is recommended by Motorola for all associated RF paths afterreplacing any of the following components:– BBX card– CCP2 shelf– cCLPA6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continued 6-80 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTBLO Calibration Data FileDuring the calibration process, the LMF creates a calibration (CAL) datafile where BLO values are stored. After calibration has been completed,these offset values must be downloaded to the BBXs using the LMFBLO download function. A detailed description of the file organizationand content is provided in the following paragraphsNOTE Due to the size of the file, Motorola recommends printing out acopy of a bts–#.cal file and referring to it for the followingdescriptions.SWhen referring to the CAL file print–out it can be seen that there isone BBX slot with 20 “calibration entries” per BBX (sector) for eachbranch. Two calibration entries define a single “calibration point;”therefore there are ten  calibration points in each branch for each BBX.– The first entry for a calibration point (all odd entries) identifies theCDMA channel (frequency) where the BLO is measured. Thesecond calibration entry (all even entries) is the power set level(PwrLvlAdj) for that frequency. The valid range for PwrLvlAdj isfrom 2500 to 27500 (2500 corresponds to –125 dBm and 27500corresponds to +125 dBm).– The ten calibration points for each slot–branch combination must bestored in order of increasing frequency. If less than ten points(frequencies) are calibrated, the BLO data for the highest frequencycalibrated is written into the remainder of the ten points for thatslot–branch.Example:C[1]=384     (odd cal entry)C[2]=19102     (even cal entry)C[3]=777     (odd cal entry)C[4]=19086     (even cal entry)C[19]=777     (odd cal entry)C[20]=19086     (even cal entry)...=  1 “calibration point”=  1 “calibration point”=  1 “calibration point”In the example above, BLO was measured at only two frequencies(channels 384 and 777) for CCP2 slot BBX–1 transmit. The BLO datafor the highest frequency measured (channel 777) will be written tothe remaining eight transmit calibration points (defined by entriesC[5] through C[20]) for BBX–1.Slot Block Temperature Compensation – Each BBX slot Block alsohas a temperature compensation data section (TempLevelCal) wherepower level compensation factors for temperature variations are stored.6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-81DRAFTCAL File and BLO Data DownloadWhen BLO data is downloaded to the BBXs after calibration, the data isdownloaded to the devices in the order it is stored in the CAL file. TXcalibration data (entries C[1] – C[60]) are sent first. Data for the tenBBX slot 1 calibration points (entries C[1] – C[20]) are sent initially,followed by data for the ten BBX slot 2 calibration points (entries C[21]– C[40]), and so on. The RX calibration data is sent next in BBX slotsequence, followed by RX Diversity calibration data.BLO for Expansion BTSThe BLO Ranges for expansion BTS configurations are listed below:Low PowerS1.9 GHz: 1 to 4 carriers: –15  7 dBS1.9 GHz: 5 to 8 carriers: –19  7dBHigh Power  (1 or 2 cCLPAs)S1.9 GHz: 1 to 2 carriers: 46 7 dBS1.9 GHz: 3 to 4 carriers: 42 7 dBS1.9 GHz: 5 to 8 carriers:  40  7dBTest Equipment Setup forRF Path CalibrationFollow the procedure in Table 6-31 and refer as needed to Figure 6-15 orFigure 6-17 to set up test equipment.Table 6-31: Procedure to Set Up Test Equipment for RF Path CalibrationStep Action1If it has not already been done, refer to the procedure in Table 6-6 (on page 6-17) to interface the LMFcomputer terminal to the frame LAN A connector.2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 6-7 (on page 6-25) to start a GUI LMF session.3If not already done, select test equipment per the procedure in Table 6-23 or Table 6-24.4If required, calibrate the test equipment per the procedure in Table 6-25.! CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the test equipment in high power configurations, all transmit (TX) testconnections must be via the 30 dB directional coupler for 1.9 GHz.Attenuators are not required for low power configuration.5For TX path calibration, connect the test equipment as shown in Figure 6-15, Figure 6-17, orFigure 6-18, depending on the communications analyzer being used.6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continued 6-82 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTransmit (TX) Path CalibrationDescriptionThe assigned channel frequency and desired power level at the frame TXports for transmit calibration are derived from the BTS CDF file. EachBBX at the site is assigned to a carrier. These are specified respectivelyin the carrier field of the ParentCARRIER parameter in each BBXs CDFfile block. The channel frequency for the assigned sector  is specified inthe ChannelList  parameter of the CDF block for the CARRIER towhich the BBX is assigned.For Low Power optimization of the SC480, the following adjustmentsmust be made to the CDF.SIn the Carrier section of the CDF, verify that the SifPilotPwr is set to–200.SIn the BTS section of the CDF, verify that the CageConf is set to 5(CCP2), and that BIOType is set to 3.Be sure the bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files loaded on theLMF computer are current. The LMF will obtain carrierand channel information from these files and insert it intothe appropriate CDMA Test Parameter screen. Failure tohave the most current files from the CBSC can result inincorrect channel information being used to calibrate theBTS and unfavorable affects on BTS performance. Carrierand channel numbers should only be entered manually forspecial test cases or as a last resort.NOTEThe calibration process attempts to adjust the measured power to within+0.5 dB of the desired power. The calibration will pass if the error is lessthan +1.5 dB.Table 6-32 lists the maximum and minimum power with and without thecCLPA.  The numbers presented may change at a later date.Table 6-32: Maximum and Minimum PowerTX Configuration Max Power Min PowerIndoor / Low Power –6.0 dBm –16.0 dBmOutdoor / Low Power –6.0 dBm –16.0 dBmIndoor / High Power 43.0 dBm / 41.76 dBm* 33.0 dBmOutdoor / High Power 43.0 dBm / 41.76 dBm* 33.0 dBm* Non–domestic maximum high power is 41.76 due to TX GSM Elimination filter. 6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-83DRAFTTX Calibration and the LMFThe LMF Tests > TX > TX Calibration... and Tests > All Cal/Audit...selections perform TX BLO calibration testing for installed BBX(s). TheAll Cal/Audit... selection initiates a series of actions to perform TXcalibration, and if calibration is successful, download BLO and performTX audit. The TX Calibration... selection performs only TXcalibration. When TX Calibration... is used, BLO download and TXaudit must be performed as separate activities. The CDMA TestParameters window which opens when TX Calibration... or AllCal/Audit... is selected contains several user–selectable features whichare described in the following subsections.Rate Set Drop–down Pick ListThe Rate Set Drop–down Box is enabled if at least one MCC card isselected for the test. The available options for TX tests are 1 = 9600, and3 = 9600 1X. Option 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for thetest. The available transfer rate options for RX tests are 1 = 9600 and2 = 14400. Option 2 is only available if no 1X cards are selected.Verify BLO Check BoxIn both the TX Calibration and All Cal/Audit dialog boxes, a VerifyBLO check box is provided and checked by default. After the actual TXcalibration is completed during either the TX Calibration or AllCal/Audit process, the BLO derived from the calibration is compared toa standard, acceptable BLO tolerance for the BTS. In some installations,additional items may be installed in the transmit path. The additionalchange in gain from these items could cause BLO verification failureand, therefore, failure of the entire calibration. In these cases, either theVerify BLO check box should be unchecked or the additional pathlosses should be added.Single–Sided BLO Check BoxAn acceptable range of BLO values for each type of BTS is establishedto allow for tolerance variations in all the components of the RF chain.This acceptable range, 42+5 dB for example, is a much wider tolerancethan necessary for the BBXs. Single–Sided BLO calibration restricts theallowable BLO variations to the lower half of the range (i.e., 37 to 42dB). Because this is a much more stringent tolerance, calibrations runwith Single–Sided BLO are more likely to fail and should only beattempted by an experienced CFE.The Tests > TX > TX Calibration... menu window has a Test Patternpull–down menu. This menu has the following choices:SStandard – performs calibration or audit using pilot, paging, synch,and six traffic channels with IS–97–specified gain. This pattern settingshould be used for all non–in–service calibrations and audits. Usingthis pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at leastone MCC.SPilot (default) – performs calibration using only the pilot channel.This pattern setting should be used for in–service calibrations, andrequires selection of only a BBX.6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continued 6-84 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTSCDFPilot – This pattern setting is for advanced users. It performscalibration or audit using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS–97 gainvalues for all the other channels included in the Standard patternsetting (paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern settingrequires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.SCDF – This pattern setting is for advanced users who need to useCDF gain settings for all channels included in the Standard patternsetting (pilot, paging, synch, and six traffic). Using this pattern settingrequires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.Test Pattern Channels and Gain Settings – The CDMA channels andtheir respective digital gain settings used for each test pattern are listedin Table 6-33.Table 6-33: Test Patterns with Channels and Gain Settings UsedTest Pattern Channel(s) Gain SettingPilot Pilot channel only 262Standard Pilot 117Synch channel (SCH) 57Paging (PCH) 114Traffic (TCH) 80 for each of 6 Walsh codes used (6*80)CDF Pilot Pilot Uses CDF–specified pilot gainSCH 57PCH 114TCH 6*80CDF Pilot All channels use CDF–specified gainsSCHPCHTCH (6)Set-up for TX CalibrationThe work–around in Table 6-34 allows the user to manually set the BLOlimits .6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-85DRAFTTable 6-34: Procedure for Initial Set-up for TX CalibrationnStep Action1Delete the existing calibration file (if any) from the BTS folder on LMF laptop from the locationC:\wlmf\cdma\bts–#, where # is the BTS number.2To edit the nominal TX BLO, from the Util menu, select Edit > TX Nominal Offset.  In the TXCal Parameter window, make any necessary changes to ensure the TX BLO Nominal Offset (indB) is set to the following:– For 1.9 GHz, TX Nominal Offset value is 44.0 (dB), and the Allowed error range, plus orminus (in dB) is 1.53Download the data, which includes BLO values, to all the BBXs. From the Device menu, select  Down-load > Data TX CalibrationBefore installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, first verify no CDMA channels arekeyed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injuryand/or equipment damage.WARNINGAlways wear an approved anti–static wrist strap whilehandling any circuit card or module. If this is not done,there is a high probability that the card or module could bedamaged by ESD.CAUTIONAt new site installations, to facilitate the complete test ofthe CCP2 Shelf empty BBX slots may be populated toensure that all BBX TX paths are tested.This procedure can be bypassed on operational sites thatare due for periodic optimization.Prior to testing, view the CDF (or NECF) file to verify thecorrect BBX slots are equipped. Edit the file as required toinclude BBX slots not currently equipped (per SystemsEngineering documentation).NOTEAll Cal/Audit and TXCalibration  ProcedureThe LMF All Cal/Audit and TX calibration procedures are essentiallyidentical, except for the step that selects the type of procedure desired(Refer to Step 4 in Table 6-35).6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continued 6-86 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTPrerequisitesBefore running this procedure, be sure that the following have beendone:SThe card in slot CSA, GLI, MCCs, and BBXs have correct code anddata loads.SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).SIf running calibration or audit using a test pattern other than Pilot,MCCs are INS_ACT (bright green).STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXcalibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS in the GUI environment.Verify all BBX cards removed and repositioned have beenreturned to their assigned shelves/slots. Any BBX cardsmoved since they were downloaded will have to bedownloaded again.NOTEFollow the procedure in Table 6-35 to perform BLO calibration on theTX paths, download BLO values to the BBXs, and perform TX pathaudit in one operation.Table 6-35: Procedure for All Cal/Audit and TX CalibrationStep Action1If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX calibration by following theprocedure in Table 6-31.2Click on the BBX(s) to be calibrated.3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to “TestPattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).4For All Cal Audit...– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > All Cal/Audit... from the pull–down menus.A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.For TX Calibration– Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Calibration from the pull–down menus.A CDMA Test Parameters window will appear.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.  If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.. . . continued on next page6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-87DRAFTTable 6-35: Procedure for All Cal/Audit and TX CalibrationStep ActionNOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 9600 1X)from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.8 If Verify BLO is to be used during the calibration, leave the checkbox checked (default).9 If Single–Sided BLO is to be used during the calibration, click on the checkbox.10 In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop–down list (referto “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in this section).11 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.12 Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed.– When the calibration process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.13 Click OK to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Re–check the test setup and connection and re–run the calibration. If thecalibration fails again, note specifics about the failure.Download BLO ProcedureAfter a successful TX path calibration, download the BLO calibrationfile data to the BBXs. BLO data is extracted from the CAL file for theBTS and downloaded to the selected BBX devices.If a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, thisprocedure does not need to be performed, as BLO isdownloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.NOTEPrerequisitesEnsure the following prerequisites have been met before proceeding.SBBXs to receive the download are OOS_RAM (yellow).STX calibration was successfully completed6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continued 6-88 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFollow the steps in Table 6-36 to download the BLO data to the BBXs.Table 6-36: Procedure to Download BLOnStep Action1Select the BBX(s) to be downloaded.2 Click Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Download > BLO from the pull–down menus. Astatus report window displays the result of the download.NOTESelected device(s) do not change color when BLO is downloaded.3 Click OK to close the status report window.Calibration Audit IntroductionThe BLO calibration audit procedure confirms the successful generationand storage of the BLO calibration values. The calibration auditprocedure measures the path gain or loss of every BBX transmit path atthe site. In this test, actual system tolerances are used to determine thesuccess or failure of a test. The same external test equipment set–uprequired for TX calibration is used for TX audit.RF path verification, BLO calibration, and BLO datadownload to BBXs must have been successfully completedprior to performing the calibration audit.NOTETX Path AuditPerform the calibration audit of the TX paths of all equipped BBX slots,per the steps in Table 6-37.Before installing any test equipment directly to any TXOUT connector, first verify there are no CDMA BBXchannels keyed. Failure to do so can result in seriouspersonal injury and/or equipment damage.WARNINGIf a successful All Cal/Audit was completed, thisprocedure does not need to be performed, as BLO isdownloaded as part of the All Cal/Audit.NOTETX Audit TestThe Tests menu item, TX Audit, performs the TX BLO Audit test forBBXs. All measurements are made through the appropriate TX outputconnector using the TX calibration setup.6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-89DRAFTPrerequisitesBefore running this test, the following should be done:SThe CSA, GLIs, BBXs have correct code load.SThe CSA and GLI are INS_ACT (bright green).SAll BBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow).STest equipment and test cables are calibrated and connected for TXBLO calibration.SLMF is logged into the BTS.TX Path Audit procedureAfter a TX calibration has been performed, or if verification of BLO datain the CAL file is required, follow the procedure in Table 6-37 toperform a BTS TX path audit.Table 6-37: Procedure for BTS TX Path AuditnStep Action1If it has not already been done, configure test equipment for TX path audit by following the procedurein Table 6-31 (TX audit uses the same configuration as TX calibration).2Select the BBX(s) to be audited.3If the Test Pattern to be used is Standard, CDFPilot, or CDF, select at least one MCC (refer to“Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibraton and the LMF” in this section).4 Click Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Audit... from the pull–down menus.  ACDMA Test Parameters window will appear.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items toselect multiple carrier(s)–sector(s).6Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.  If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf (or bts–#.necf) and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channelsbox.7If at least one MCC was selected in Step 3, select the appropriate transfer rate (1 = 9600, 3 = 96001X) from the drop–down list in the Rate Set box.NOTEThe rate selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.. . . continued on next page6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continued 6-90 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 6-37: Procedure for BTS TX Path AuditnActionStep8From the Test Pattern pick list, select a test pattern.– Selecting Pilot (default) performs tests using a pilot signal only.– Selecting Standard performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels. Thisrequires an MCC to be selected.– Selecting CDFPilot performs tests using the CDF value for pilot gain and IS–97 gain valuesfor all the other channels included in the Standard pattern setting (paging, synch, and sixtraffic). Using this pattern setting requires the selection of both a BBX and at least one MCC.– Selecting CDF performs tests using pilot, synch, paging and six traffic channels, however, thegain for the channel elements is specified in the CDF file.9 Click OK to display the status report window followed by a Directions pop-up window.10 Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed.  When the calibration process iscompleted, results will be displayed in the status report window.11 Click on the Save Results or Dismiss button, as desired, to close the status report window. Exception HandlingIn the event of a failure, the calibration procedure displays a FAILmessage in the status report window and provides information in theDescription field.Create CAL FileThe LMF Create CAL File function gets the BLO data from BBXs andcreates or updates the CAL file for the BTS. After a BTS has been fullyoptimized a copy of the CAL file must exist so it can be transferred tothe CBSC. If TX calibration has been successfully performed for allBBXs and BLO data has been downloaded, the BLO data must be savedto the CAL file in the BTS folder.  If this is a first time calibration andno CAL file is stored in the BTS folder, the procedure in Table 6-38 willcreate the file and store the BLO data in it. If the CAl file already exists,this procedure will update it with the new BLO data. Note the following:SThe Create Cal File function only applies to selected (highlighted)BBXs.Editing the CAL file is not encouraged as this action cancause interface problems between the BTS and the LMF.To manually edit the CAL file you must first logout of theBTS. If you manually edit the CAL file and then use theCreate Cal File function the edited information will be lost.CAUTIONPrerequisitesBefore running the procedure in Table 6-38, the following should bedone:6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  6-91DRAFTSLMF is logged into the BTSSBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow)SBLO has been downloaded to the BBXsTable 6-38: Create CAL FileStep Action1Select the applicable BBXs.– The CAL file will be updated for the selected BBXs only.2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Create Cal File from the pull–down menu.– A status report window will appear and display the results of the action.3Click the OK button to close the status report window. 6
Bay Level Offset Calibration  – continued 6-92 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTNotes6
Jun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTChapter 7: Automated Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP)Table of ContentsAutomated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction 7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reduced ATP 7-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Test Options 7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Prerequisites 7-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EV–DO Optimization and ATP 7-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Tests – Test Set Up 7-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Test Equipment 7-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acceptance Test Equipment Set Up 7-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests 7-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All–inclusive Tests 7-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX/RX ATP Test 7-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All TX ATP Test 7-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All RX ATP Test 7-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction 7-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Acceptance Tests 7-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Individual Tests 7-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test 7-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 7-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectral Purity TX Mask  Acceptance Test 7-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 7-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 7-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance Test 7-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 7-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 7-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test 7-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test 7-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 7-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Test 7-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX FER Acceptance Test 7-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 7-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FER Acceptance Test 7-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating an ATP Report 7-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background 7-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATP Report 7-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Table of Contents  – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004Notes7
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – IntroductionJun 2004 7-11X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTIntroductionGeneralThe Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) allow Cellular Field Engineers(CFEs) to run automated acceptance tests on all BTS subsystem devicesequipped in the CDF using the LMF and the test equipment it supports.Test ReportsThe CFE can choose to save the results of ATP tests to a report file fromwhich ATP reports are generated for later printing. See the Generating anATP Report section in this chapter.Test Equipment SelectionBecause test equipment functions during acceptance testing arecontrolled by the LMF through the GPIB, only the test equipmentmodels supported by the LMF can be used.1. Before using the LMF, read the Developer ReleaseNotes section in the LMF Help function on–linedocumentation for any applicable information.2. The ATP test is to be performed on out-of-servicesectors only.3. DO NOT substitute test equipment with other modelsnot supported by the LMF.IMPORTANT*Test Equipment Set CalibrationRefer to Chapter 3 for detailed interconnection information needed forcalibrating equipment, cables, and other test equipment set components.Reduced ATPEquipment has been factory–tested for FCC compliance. Iflicense–governing bodies require documentationsupporting BTS site compliance with regulations, a fullATP may be necessary. Perform the Reduced ATP only ifreports for the specific BTS site are NOT required.NOTEAfter downloading the proper operational software to the BTS, the CFEmust perform these procedures (minimum recommendation):1. Verify the TX/RX paths by performing TX Calibration, TX Audit,and FER tests.7
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-22. Retrieve Calibration Data required for normal site operation.In the unlikely event that the BTS passes these tests but has a forwardlink problem during normal operation, the CFE should then perform theadditional TX tests for troubleshooting:  TX spectral mask, TX rho, andTX code domain.ATP Test OptionsATP tests can be run individually or as one of the following groups:SAll TX: TX tests verify the performance of the BTS transmitelements. These include the GLI, MCC, BBX, trunking modules, theLPAs, and passive components including splitters, combiners,bandpass filter(s), and RF cables.SAll RX: The RX test verifies the performance of the BTS receiveelements. These include the MPC, EMPC (for companion frames),BBX, MCC, GLI modules, and the passive components including RXfilters and RF cables.SAll TX/RX: Executes all TX and RX tests.SFull Optimization: Executes the TX calibration, downloads BLO,and executes the TX audit before running all TX and RX tests.ATP PrerequisitesBefore attempting to run any ATP tests, be sure the following have beencompleted:SBTS has been optimized (BBXs calibrated and BLOs downloaded)(Chapter 3)SThe carrier(s) and/or sector(s) to be tested have been taken out ofservice at the CBSC.SLMF is logged into the BTSSCSA, GLI, BBXs, and MCC have correct code and data loadsSThe CSA and GLI are INS_ACT (bright green)SMCCs are INS_ACT (bright green)SBBXs are OOS_RAM (yellow)STest cables are calibratedSTest equipment has been selected, warmed up 60 minutes, andcalibratedSGPIB is onSNo BBXs are keyed (transmitting)SBTS transmit connectors are properly terminated for the test(s) to beperformed7
Automated Acceptance Test Procedure – Introduction – continuedJun 2004 7-31X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFT1. All transmit connectors must be properly terminatedfor all ATP tests.2. Before the FER is run, be sure that one of thefollowing is done:– All transmitter connectors are properly terminatedOR– The Compact PA is turned OFF (circuit breakerspulled)Failure to observe these warnings may result in bodilyinjury or equipment damage.WARNINGEV–DO Optimization and ATPAppendix A contains procedures for testing the DO card using the LMF.The procedures are unproven at this time. To load the DO card, the LocalMaintenance Tool (LMT) must be used. For further information on theLMT refer to the following manuals:SLMT Command References – 68P09258A03SLMT Operator’s Guide – 68P09258A04There are ATP tests available specifically for DO. For furtherinformation refer to the following manual:S1xEV–DO System ATP – 68P09258A027
Acceptance Tests – Test Set UpDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-4Required Test EquipmentThe following test equipment is required:SLMFSPower meter (used with HP438 and Agilent 8935)SCommunications system analyzerSSignal generator for FER testing (required for all communicationssystem analyzers for 1X FER)Before installing any test equipment directly to any BTSTX OUT connector, verify that there are no CDMAchannels keyed.At active sites, have the OMCR/CBSC place the carrierassigned to the cCLPAs under test OOS. Failure to do socan result in serious personal injury and/or equipmentdamage.WARNINGThe test equipment must be re–calibrated before using it toperform the TX Acceptance Tests.NOTEAcceptance Test EquipmentSet UpAll ATP testing – Follow the steps in Table 7-1 to set up test equipmentfor all tests.Table 7-1: Set Up Test Equipment – TX Output Verify/Control TestsStep Action1If it has not already been done, interface the LMF computer to the BTS (refer to Table 6-6 andFigure 6-3).2If it has not already been done, refer to Table 6-7 to start a GUI LMF session and log into the BTS.3If it has not already been done, refer to Figure 6-19, Figure 6-20, Figure 6-21, or Figure 6-22,applicable, for the test equipment and antennas being used, to connect test equipment for acceptancetesting.* IMPORTANTLMF–based measurements factor in TX test cable loss between the BTS and test equipment. Ifadditional attenuation, such as external TX combiners, is inserted in the path, it must be identified tothe LMF by including it in the TX test cable calibration. If this is not possible, include the attenuationin the TX path by editing cable loss values (refer to Table 6-29). Failure to do this will result in testinaccuracies and potential for erroneous ATP failures  because the additional losses would not becompensated for in the test measurements. 7
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance TestsJun 2004 7-51X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTAll–inclusive TestsGeneral – The all–inclusive acceptance tests are performed from theLMF GUI environment. These all–inclusive tests are called abbreviatedATPs because they execute various combinations of individualacceptance tests with a single command. This allows verification ofmultiple aspects of BTS performance while minimizing time needed forindividual test set up and initiation.Abbreviated ATP Options – There are three abbreviated acceptancetests which evaluate different performance aspects of the BTS. Thisallows the CFE to select testing to meet the specific requirements forindividual maintenance and performance verification situations. Thefollowing summarizes the coverage of each abbreviated test:SAll TX/RX. Performs all transmit and receive ATPs on the selectedMCCs and BBXs.SAll TX. Performs complete set of transmit ATPs on the selectedMCCs and BBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing all of thefollowing individual tests:–TX Mask Test–Rho Test–Pilot Time Offset Test–Code Domain Power TestSAll RX. Performs complete receive ATP on the selected MCCs andBBXs. Testing is the equivalent of performing the following:–FER TestAbbreviated ATP Procedures – Procedures to accomplish each type ofabbreviated ATP are included in the following subsections. 7
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-6All TX/RX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 7-2 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive transmit and receive test.Table 7-2: All TX/RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment initially for abbreviated tests as described in Table 7-1.* IMPORTANTIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than theone to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the newMulti–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All TX/RX ATP... from the pull–down menu.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6* IMPORTANTIf a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do notselect BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for thisconfiguration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the propertest signal gain.Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop–down list.7In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thedrop–down list.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.8In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the acceptance tests from the drop–down list(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay LevelOffset Calibration section of Chapter 6.9 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.10 Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.. . . continued on next page7
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continuedJun 2004 7-71X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTTable 7-2: All TX/RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action11 Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. All TX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 7-3 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive transmit test.Table 7-3: All TX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 7-1.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All TX ATP... from the pull–down menu.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the acceptance test from the drop–down list(refer to “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay LevelOffset Calibration section of Chapter 6.7 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.8Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.9Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. All RX ATP Test Follow the procedures in Table 7-4 to perform the abbreviated,all–inclusive receive test.7
Abbreviated (All–inclusive) Acceptance Tests – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-8Table 7-4: All RX ATP Test ProcedureStep Action1Set up the test equipment for abbreviated tests per Table 7-1.* IMPORTANTIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than theone to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the newMulti–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select All RX ATP... from the pull–down menu.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6* IMPORTANTIf a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do notselect BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for thisconfiguration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the propertest signal gain.Select the appropriate RX branch (BOTH, MAIN, or DIVersity) in the drop–down list.7In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thedrop–down list.NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.8 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.9Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– When the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.10 Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 7
Individual Acceptance Tests–IntroductionJun 2004 7-91X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTIndividual Acceptance TestsThe following individual ATP tests can be used to evaluate specificaspects of BTS operation against individual performance requirements.All testing is performed using the LMF GUI environment.TX TestingTX tests verify any given transmit antenna path and output powercontrol. All tests are performed using the external, calibrated testequipment. All measurements are made at the appropriate BTS TX OUTconnector(s).TX tests verify TX operation of the entire CDMA forward link usingselected BBXs assigned to respective sector antennas. Each BBX iskeyed up to generate a CDMA carrier (using both bbxlevel and BLO)at the CDF file–specified carrier output power level.RX TestingRX testing verifies receive antenna paths for BBXs selected for the test.All tests are performed using the external, calibrated test equipment toinject a CDMA RF carrier with all zero longcode at the specified RXfrequency at the appropriate BTS RX IN connector(s).RX tests verify RX operation of the entire CDMA reverse link using allequipped MCCs assigned to all respective sector/antennas.Individual TestsSpectral Purity TX MaskThis test verifies that the transmitted CDMA carrier waveform generatedon each sector meets the transmit spectral mask specification (as definedin IS–97) with respect to the assigned CDF file values.Waveform Quality (Rho)This test verifies that the transmitted Pilot channel element digitalwaveform quality (rho) exceeds the minimum specified value in IS–97.Rho represents the correlation between the actual and perfect CDMAmodulation spectrums. 1.0000 represents 100% (or perfect correlation).Pilot Time OffsetThe Pilot Time Offset is the difference between the communicationssystem test set measurement interval (based on the BTS system timereference) and the incoming block of transmitted data from the BTS(Pilot only, Walsh code 0).Code Domain Power/Noise FloorThis test verifies the code domain power levels, which have been set forall ODD numbered Walsh channels, using the OCNS command. This isdone by verifying that the ratio of PILOT divided by OCNS is equal to10.2 + 2 dB, and, that the noise floor of all EVEN numbered “OFF”Walsh channels measures < –27 dB for IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1Xwith respect to total CDMA channel power.7
Individual Acceptance Tests–Introduction – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-10BTS FERThis test verifies the BTS receive FER on all traffic channel elementscurrently configured on all equipped MCCs (fullrate at one percent FER)at an RF input level of –119 dBm on the main RX antenna paths usingoperator–selected, CDF–equipped MCCs and BBXs at the site. DiversityRX antenna paths are also tested using the lowest equipped MCCchannel element ONLY.There are no pass/fail criteria associated with FER readingstaken at levels below –119 dBm, other than to verify thatthe FER measurement reflects changes in the RX inputsignal level.NOTE7
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance TestJun 2004 7-111X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTBackgroundOverview – This test verifies the spectral purity of eachoperator–selected BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency specifiedin the current CDF. All tests are performed using the external, calibratedtest equipment controlled by the same command. All measurements aremade at the appropriate BTS TX antenna connector.Test Patterns – There are four operator–selectable test patterns withwhich this acceptance test can be performed. The patterns, along with thechannels tested and gain setting for each, are listed in Table 6-33. Referto “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay Level Offset Calibrationsection for more information on the test patterns.Equipment Operation During Testing – At least one MCC must beselected to perform the Standard, CDF Pilot, and CDF test patterns. Forthese test patterns, forward links will be enabled for synch channel(SCH), paging channel (PCH), and traffic channel (TCH) elements fromthe selected MCC(s), as shown in Table 6-33. Gain will be set for theapplicable channels on each antenna as shown in the table. Theoperator–selected BBXs will be keyed using a BLO–corrected bbxlvlvalue to generate a CDMA carrier. RF output power, as measured at theappropriate frame TX antenna connector, will be set to one of thefollowing depending on the operating frequency spectrum:S800 MHz:  33.5 dBmTest Measurements – The test equipment will measure and return theattenuation level in dB of all spurious and IM products with respect tothe mean power of the CDMA channel measured in a 1.23 MHzbandwidth, verifying that results meet system tolerances at the followingtest points (see also Figure 7-1):SFor 800 MHz:– At least –45 dB @ + 750 kHz from center frequency– At least –45 dB @ – 750 kHz from center frequency– At least –60 dB @ – 1980 kHz from center frequency– At least –60 dB @  + 1980 kHz from center frequencySpectral Purity TX MaskAcceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 7-5 to verify the transmit spectral maskspecification on the TX antenna paths for the selected BBXs.Table 7-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit MaskStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 7-1.. . . continued on next page7
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-12Table 7-5: Test Spectral Purity Transmit MaskStep Action2Select the BBXs to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > TX Mask... from the pull–down menus.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6In the Test Pattern box, select the test pattern to use for the calibration from the drop–down list (referto “Test Pattern Drop–down Pick List” under “TX Calibration and the LMF” in the Bay Level OffsetCalibration section.7 Click OK to display a status  bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.8Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in a status report window.9Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 7
TX Spectral Purity Transmit Mask Acceptance Test – continuedJun 2004 7-131X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTFigure 7-1: TX Mask Verification Spectrum Analyzer Display– 885 kHz + 885 kHzCenter Frequency ReferenceAttenuation level of allspurious and IM productswith respect to the meanpower of the CDMA channel.5 MHz Span/DivAmpl 10 dB/DivMean CDMA Bandwidth Power Reference– 1980 kHz+750 kHz+ 1980 kHz– 750 kHz7
TX Waveform Quality (Rho) Acceptance TestDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-14BackgroundOverview – This test verifies the transmitted pilot channel elementdigital waveform quality of each operator–selected BBX carrier keyed upat a specific frequency specified in the current CDF. All tests areperformed using the external, calibrated test equipment controlled by thesame command. All measurements are made at the appropriate TXantenna connector.Equipment Operation During Testing – Pilot gain will be set to 262for each antenna, and all TCH elements from the MCCs will beforward–link disabled. The selected BBXs will be keyed up using bothbbxlvl and BLO to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channelelement only, Walsh code 0). RF output power is set at 40 dBm asmeasured at the appropriate BTS TX antenna connector.Test Measurements – The test equipment will measure and return thepilot channel element digital waveform quality (rho) percentage,verifying that the result meets the following specification:Waveform quality (Rho) should be > 0.98.Waveform Quality (Rho)Acceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 7-6 to verify the pilot channel elementwaveform quality (rho) on the TX antenna paths for the selected BBXs.Table 7-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho)Step Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 7-1.2Select the BBXs to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > Rho... from the pull–down menus.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in a status report window.. . . continued on next page7
TX Waveform Quality (rho) Acceptance Test – continuedJun 2004 7-1568P09253A601X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTTable 7-6: Test Waveform Quality (Rho)Step Action8Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 7
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance TestDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-16BackgroundOverview – This test verifies the transmitted pilot channel element PilotTime Offset of each operator–selected BBX carrier keyed up at a specificfrequency specified in the current CDF. All tests will be performed usingthe external, calibrated test equipment controlled by the same command.All measurements will be made at the BTS TX antenna connector.Equipment Operation During Testing – The pilot gain will be set to262 for each antenna and all TCH elements from the MCCs will beforward–link disabled. The selected BBXs will be keyed using bothbbxlvl and BLO to generate a CDMA carrier (with pilot channelelement only, Walsh code 0). TX power output is set at 40 dBm asmeasured at the TX output.Test Measurements – The test equipment will measure and return thePilot Time Offset in ms, verifying that results meet the followingspecification:Pilot Time Offset should be within 3 ms of the target PT Offset (zero ms).This test also executes and returns the TX Frequency andTX Waveform Quality (rho) ATP tests, however, only PilotTime Offset results are written to the ATP test report.NOTEPilot Time Offset AcceptanceTestFollow the steps in Table 7-7 to verify the Pilot Time Offset on the TXantenna paths for the selected BBXs.Table 7-7: Test Pilot Time OffsetStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 7-1.2Select the BBXs to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > Pilot Time Offset... from the pull–down menus.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).. . . continued on next page7
TX Pilot Time Offset Acceptance Test – continuedJun 2004 7-171X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTTable 7-7: Test Pilot Time OffsetStep Action5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in a status report window.8Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 7
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance TestDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-18BackgroundOverview – This test verifies the Code Domain Power and Noise Floorof each operator–selected BBX carrier keyed at a specific frequencyspecified in the current CDF. All tests are performed using the external,calibrated test equipment controlled by the same command. Allmeasurements are made at the appropriate BTS TX antenna connector.CDMA Channel Test Set–up – Pilot gain will be set to 262 for eachantenna and the selected MCCs will be configured to supply allodd–numbered Walsh code traffic channel elements by enablingOrthogonal Channel Noise Source (OCNS) on all odd MCC channelelements (maximum 32 full rate channels with an OCNS gain of 81). Alleven–numbered Walsh code traffic channel elements will not haveOCNS enabled, and are considered “OFF”. Selected MCCs will beforward–link enabled for the antenna (sector) under test.Equipment Operation During Testing – The BBX will be keyed upusing a BLO–corrected bbxlvl value to generate a CDMA carrierconsisting of pilot and OCNS channels. RF output power, as measured atthe appropriate frame TX antenna connector, is set at one of thefollowing values depending on the operating frequency spectrum:S800 MHz:  33.5 dBmTest Measurements – The test equipment will measure and return thechannel element power in dB of all specified Walsh channels within theCDMA spectrum. Additional calculations will be performed to verify thefollowing parameters are met (refer to Figure 7-2 for graphicrepresentations):STraffic channel element power level will be verified by calculating theratio of Pilot power to OCNS gain of all traffic channels (root sum ofthe square (RSS) of each OCNS gain divided by the Pilot power).This value should be 10.2 dB + 2.0 dB.SNoise floor (unassigned “OFF” even–numbered Walsh channels) isverified to be < –27 dB for IS–95A/B and CDMA2000 1X withrespect to total CDMA channel power.Code Domain Power/NoiseFloor TestFollow the steps in Table 7-8 to verify the Code Domain Power/Noisefloor of each selected BBX carrier keyed up at a specific frequency.7
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continuedJun 2004 7-191X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTTable 7-8: Test Code Domain Power/Noise FloorStep Action1Set up the test equipment for TX acceptance tests per Table 7-1.2Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.3Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select TX > Code Domain Power... from the pull–downmenus.4Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).5Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.6 Click OK to display a status  bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.7Follow the cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in a status report window.8Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 7
TX Code Domain Power/Noise Floor Acceptance Test – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-20Pilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < –27 dB FOR IS–95A/B ANDCDMA2000 1XInactive channelsWalsh  0  1  2   3  4  5  6   7  ... 64MAX OCNSCHANNELMIN OCNSCHANNEL8.2 dB 12.2 dBMAX NOISEFLOORPilot ChannelActive channelsPILOT LEVELMAX OCNS SPEC.MIN OCNS SPEC.MAXIMUM NOISE FLOOR: < –27 dB FOR IS–95A/B ANDCDMA2000 1XInactive channelsWalsh  0  1  2   3  4  5  6   7  ... 64FAILURE – DOES NOTMEET MIN OCNS SPEC.FAILURE – EXCEEDSMAX OCNS SPEC. 8.2 dB 12.2 dBFAILURE – EXCEEDS MAXNOISE FLOOR SPEC.Code Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Pass) ExampleFigure 7-2: Code Domain Analyzer CD Power/Noise Floor Display ExamplesCode Domain Power/Noise Floor (OCNS Failure) Example7
RX FER Acceptance TestJun 2004 7-211X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTBackgroundOverview – This test verifies the BTS Frame Erasure Rate (FER) on allTCHs currently configured on operator–selected MCCs (fullrate at 1%FER) at –119 dBm. All tests are performed using the external, calibratedtest equipment as the signal source controlled by the same command.Measurements are made at the specified BTS RX antenna connection.Equipment Operation During Testing – The pilot gain on each MCCwill be set to 262 for each TX antenna, and the forward link for all TCHelements from the MCCs will be enabled. Appropriate BBX(s) must bekeyed in order to enable the RX receive circuitry. Operator–selectedBBXs will be keyed using only bbxlvl, to generate a CDMA carrierwith pilot channel element only. Transmit power output is set at –40dBm. Test equipment output power is set so that the received power atthe BBX is –119 dBm. The final output power setting of the testequipment takes into account the MPC type, BTS RF path losses, andtest cable losses. .Test Measurements – The LMF will prompt the MCC channel elementunder test to measure all–zero longcode and provide the FER report onthe selected active MCC on the reverse link for the main and, if selected,diversity RX antenna paths. Results are evaluated to ensure they meetthe following specification:FER returned less than 1% and Total Frames measured is 1500FER Acceptance TestFollow the steps in Table 7-9 to verify the FER on RX antenna pathsusing selected MCCs and BBXs.Table 7-9: Test FERStep Action1Set up the test equipment for RX acceptance tests per Table 7-1.2* IMPORTANTIf the LMF has been logged into the BTS with a different Multi–Channel Preselector setting than theone to be used for this test, the LMF must be logged out of the BTS and logged in again with the newMulti–Channel Preselector setting. Using the wrong MPC setting can cause a false test failure.3Select the BBXs and MCCs to be tested.4Click on Tests in the BTS menu bar, and select RX > FER... from the pull–down menu.5Select the appropriate carrier(s) and sector(s) (carrier-bts#-sector#-carrier#) from those displayed in theChannels/Carrier pick list.6NOTETo select multiple items, hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while clicking on pick list items to selectmultiple carrier(s)–sector(s).. . . continued on next page7
RX FER Acceptance Test – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-22Table 7-9: Test FERStep Action7Verify that the correct channel number for the selected carrier is shown in the Carrier # Channelsbox.– If it is not, obtain the latest bts–#.cdf and cbsc–#.cdf files from the CBSC.8NOTEIf necessary, the correct channel number may be manually entered into the Carrier # Channels box.9* IMPORTANTIf a companion frame with the inter–frame diversity RX cabling disconnected is being tested do notselect BOTH in this step. The RX main and diversity paths must be tested separately for thisconfiguration because each requires a different Multi–Coupler Preselector type to provide the propertest signal gain.10 Select the appropriate RX branch (Both, Main, or Diversity) in the drop–down list.11 In the Rate Set box, select the appropriate data rate (1=9600, 2=14400, 3=9600 1X) from thedrop–down list.12 NOTEThe Rate Set selection of 3 is only available if 1X cards are selected for the test.13 Click OK to display a status bar followed by a Directions pop-up window.14 Follow cable connection directions as they are displayed, and click the Continue button to begintesting.– As the ATP process is completed, results will be displayed in the status report window.15 Click the Save Results or Dismiss button.NOTEIf Dismiss is used, the test results will not be saved in the test report file. 7
Generating an ATP ReportJun 2004 7-231X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTBackgroundEach time an ATP test is run, ATP data is updated and must be saved toan ATP report file using the Save Results button to close the statusreport window. The ATP report file will not be updated if the statusreports window is closed using the Dismiss button.ATP ReportA separate report is created for each BTS and includes the following foreach test:STest nameSPASS or FAILSDescription information (if applicable)SBBX numberSChannel numberSCarrier numberSSector numberSUpper test limitSLower test limitSTest resultSTime stampSDetails/Warning information (if applicable)Follow the procedures in the Table 7-10 to view and create a printablefile for the ATP report.Table 7-10: Generating an ATP ReportStep Action1Click on the Login tab (if not in the forefront).2Click on the desired BTS in the Available Base Stations pick list to select it.3Click on the Report button.4If a printable file is not needed, click on the Dismiss button.5If a printable file is required, perform the following:5a – Select the desired file type (text, comma–delimited, HTML) for the report file from thedrop–down list at the bottom of the screen.5b – Click the Save button to save the file.–– The file will be saved in the selected format in the bts–# folder for the BTS selected. 7
Generating an ATP Report – continuedDRAFT1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 20047-24Notes7
Jun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTChapter 8: Leave the SiteTable of ContentsUpdating Calibration Data Files 8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Release caveats 8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy and Load Cal File to to CBSC 8-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prepare to Leave the Site 8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Test Equipment Removal 8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bringing Modules into Service with the LMF 8-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WinLMF Removal 8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting BTS T1/E1 Spans 8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Final Checks before leaving site 8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset All Devices and Initialize Site Remotely 8-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Table of Contents  – continued1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTNotes8
Updating Calibration Data FilesJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  8-1DRAFTSoftware Release caveatsWith Software Release 2.16.1.x, the packet BTS will NOT detect a newcalibration file on the OMC–R. A manual workaround is available inbulletin cdma_g_bts_059. This will be corrected in Software Release2.16.3.Software Release 2.16.3 will allow the user to load the calibration filefrom the LMF directly onto the MGLI. The MGLI will then ftp the newcalibration file to the OMC–R, thereby eliminating the need for the userto place the calibration file at the OMC–R.Copy and Load Cal File to toCBSCAfter completing the TX calibration and audit, updated CAL fileinformation must be moved from the LMF Windows environment backto the CBSC, a Unix environment. The following procedures detailmoving files from one environment to the other.Copying CAL files from LMF to a DisketteFollow the procedures in Table 8-1 to copy the CAL files from an LMFcomputer to a 3.5 diskette.Table 8-1: Copying CAL Files to a DisketteStep Action1 With Windows running on the LMF computer, insert a disk into Drive A:\.2Launch the Windows Explorer application program from the Start > Programs menu list.3Select the applicable <x>:\<lmf home directory/cdma/bts–# folder.4Drag the bts–#.cal file to Drive A.5Repeat Steps 3 and 4, as required, for other bts–# folders. 8
Updating Calibration Data Files  – continued 8-2 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTCopying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCFollow the procedures in Table 8-2 to copy CAL files from a diskette tothe CBSC.Table 8-2: Copying CAL Files from Diskette to the CBSCStep Action1Log into the CBSC on the OMC–R Unix workstation using your account name and password.2Place the diskette containing calibration files (cal files) in the workstation diskette drive.3Type in eject –q and press the Enter key.4 Enter mount and press the Enter key.  Verify that  floppy/no_name is displayed.NOTEIf the eject command has been previously entered, floppy/no_name will be appended with anumber.  Use the explicit floppy/no_name reference displayed.5Type in cd /floppy/no_name and press the Enter key.6Type in ls –lia and press the Enter key. Verify the bts–#.cal file filename appears in the displayeddirectory listing.7Type in cd and press the Enter key.8Type in pwd and press the Enter key. Verify the displayed response shows the correct homedirectory (/home/<user’s name>).9 With Solaris versions of Unix, create a Unix–formatted version of the bts–#.cal file in the homedirectory by performing the following:9a – Type in dos2unix  /floppy/no_name/bts–#.cal  bts–#.cal and press the Enter key.Where:  #  =  BTS number for which the CAL file was createdNOTEOther versions of Unix do not support the dos2unix command. In these cases, use the Unix cp(copy) command. The copied files will contain DOS line feed characters which must be edited outwith a Unix text editor.10 Type in ls –l *.cal and press the Enter key. Verify the CAL files have been copied. Verify all CALfiles to be transferred appear in the displayed listing.11 Type eject and press the Enter key.12 Remove the diskette from the workstation. 8
Prepare to Leave the SiteJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  8-3DRAFTExternal Test EquipmentRemoval Perform the procedure in Table 8-3 to disconnect the test equipment andconfigure the BTS for active service.Table 8-3: Remove External Test EquipmentStep Action1n WARNINGBe sure no BBXs are keyed before performing this step. Failure to do so can result in personal injuryand damage to BTS LPAs.Disconnect all external test equipment from all TX and RX connectors at the rear of the frame.2Reconnect and visually inspect all TX and RX antenna feed lines at the frame RF interface panel.NOTEVerify that all sector antenna feed lines are connected to the correct antenna connectors on the frame.Crossed antenna cables will degrade call processing.Bringing Modules into Servicewith the LMFWhenever possible, have the CBSC/MM bring up the siteand enable all devices at the BTS.NOTEIf there is a reason code and/or data should or could not be loadedremotely from the CBSC, follow the steps outlined in Table 8-4 asrequired to bring BTS processor modules from OOS to INS state.Table 8-4: Bring Modules into ServiceStep Action1In the WinLMF GUI environment, select the device(s) to be enabled by clicking on each one.NOTESThe GLI and CSA must be INS_ACT (bright green) before an MCC can be enabled.SProcessors which must be enabled and the order of enabling are as follows:1. GLI2. CSA3. MCCs2Click on Device in the BTS menu bar, and select Enable from the pull–down list.– A status report window is displayed.3NOTEIf a BBX is selected, a transceiver parameters window is displayed to collect keying information. Donot enable the BBX.. . . continued on next page8
Prepare to Leave the Site  – continued 8-4 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 8-4: Bring Modules into ServiceStep Action4 Click Cancel to close the transceiver parameters window, if applicable.5 Click OK to close the status report window.– The color of devices which successfully change to INS will change bright green. WinLMF RemovalPerform the procedure in Table 8-5 as required to terminate the WinLMFGUI session and remove the WinLMF computer.Table 8-5: Terminate the WinLMF Session and Remove the WinLMFStep Action1! CAUTIONDo not power down the WinLMF terminal without performing the procedure below. Corrupted/lostdata files may result.Log out of all BTS sessions and exit WinLMF by clicking on File in the WinLMF window menu bar andselecting Logout and Exit from the pull–down list.2In the Windows Task Bar, click Start and select Shutdown. Click Yes when the Shut Down Windowsmessage appears.3Wait for the system to shut down and the screen to go blank.4Disconnect the WinLMF terminal Ethernet port from the BTS frame.5Disconnect the WinLMF terminal serial port, the RS–232–to–GPIB interface box, and the GPIBcables as required for equipment transport.Connecting BTS T1/E1 SpansPerform the procedure in Table 8-6 to connect any T1 or E1 spanconnectors removed previously to allow the WinLMF to control theBTS.Table 8-6: Connect T1 or E1 SpansStep Action1Re–connect any disconnected span lines.2Verify span status, ensuring the OMC–R/CBSC can communicate with the BTS.8
Prepare to Leave the Site  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  8-5DRAFTFinal Checks before leavingsiteBe sure all requirements listed in Table 8-7 are completed before leavingthe site.Table 8-7: Check Before Leaving the SiteStep Action1When backup batteries are installed, all battery circuit breakers are  ON (pushed in).2BTS circuit breaker is ON (pushed in).3No alarm conditions are being reported to the OMC–R.Reset All Devices and InitializeSite RemotelyDevices in the BTS should not be left with data and code loaded fromthe WinLMF. The configuration data and code loads used for normaloperation could be different from those stored in the WinLMF files.Perform the procedure in Table 8-8 to reset all devices and initialize siteremotely.Table 8-8: Reset BTS Devices and Remote Site InitializationStep Action1Terminate the WinLMF session by following the procedures in Table 8-5.2Reconnect spans by following the procedure in Table 8-6.3Circuit BTS Procedure:3a From the BTS site, contact the OMC–R and request the operator to perform a BTS reset.orAt the BTS site:– unseat the GLI card and wait for 30 seconds;3b Have the operator  perform the following:SACTIVATE the GLI to set the Nextload attribute for the GLI to the one for the current BSSsoftware version;SDisable the GLI;SEnable the GLI to allow the MM to load the software version specified by the Nextloadattribute;SOnce the GLI is INS_ACT, contact the OMC–R and request the operator ACTIVATE the BTS.– Once the GLI card is loaded with the specified code version, the GLI will verify and update, asrequired, the RAM and, if it is necessary, ROM code loads for the installed CSA, MCC, and BBXcards using the DLM.4After all activities at the site have been completed, contact the OMC–R and confirm that the BTS isunder OMC–R control. 8
Prepare to Leave the Site  – continued 8-6 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTNotes8
Jun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTChapter 9: Field Replaceable UnitTable of ContentsIntroduction 9-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scope 9-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Organization 9-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan Module 9-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High and Medium Stability Oscillator Module 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Panel Indicator 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Positioning System (GPS) Receivers 9-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF–GPS Module 9-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module (PSM) 9-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Consideration 9-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock Synchronization Alarms Card 9-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table of Contents  – continued1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTSystem Impact/Considerations 9-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group Line Interface Card 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Requirement 9-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi–Channel CDMA Card 9-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC Front Panel 9-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Requirement 9-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broadband Transceiver Card 9-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/ Considerations 9-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Panel 9-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required items 9-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Requirement 9-34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact BTS Multi–Coupler Preselector Card 9-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required items 9-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCC Data Only (MCC–DO) Card 9-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EV–DO FRU Information 9-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED States 9-41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact BTS Input and Output Board 9-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBIO Indicators 9-45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table of Contents  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTPrerequisite 9-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDCX  Module 9-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Filter Tray 9-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221 Removal Procedure 9-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cMPC Cable Clip Removal Procedure 9-57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cMPC Cable Clip Installation Procedure 9-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221 9-58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220 Removal Procedure 9-61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220 9-63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter Tray Kit SGLN6219 Removal Procedure 9-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6219 9-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier 9-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TME Power Distribution Assembly 9-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heat Management System 9-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic Maintenance 9-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Element Replacement Procedure 9-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater Element Installation Procedure 9-77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS Controller Replacement Procedure 9-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS Controller Installation Procedure 9-78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Fan Replacement Procedure 9-79 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table of Contents  – continued1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTBlower Fan Installation Procedure 9-80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal Management Enclosure 9-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Items 9-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisite 9-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Distribution Enclosure 9-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Impact/Considerations 9-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Procedure 9-85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Item Number Failure List 9-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 9-86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
IntroductionJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-1DRAFTScopeThe objective of the Field Replaceable Unit (FRU ) section containsOMC–R procedures and information and procedures for disassemblingand/or replacing cards, modules, and components of the Compact BTS.The Compact BTS is a single cage, non–redundant configuration.Section OrganizationThe FRU section is organized in the following manner:SCompact BTS FRU procedures that are performed by a technician atthe siteSOMC–R procedures performed by the operatorBTS FRU ProceduresThe BTS FRU procedures are grouped by major functional areas withinthe BTS and presented as follows:SCompact BTS Input/Output (CBIO) Board Replacement Procedure– Synchronization Daisy–Chaining and eXpansion (SDCX) ModuleReplacement Procedure– RF GPS Module Replacement ProcedureSCCP2 Card and Shelf Replacement ProceduresSRF Component Replacement ProceduresSHigh Stability Oscillator/Medium Stability Oscillator (HSO/MSO)Replacement ProcedureExternal Components – The following external components areoptional SCompact Combined Linear Power Amplifier (cCLPA) ReplacementProcedureOMC–R ProceduresDescribes procedures that can be performed only by the operator fromthe OMC–R site.If the OMC–R operator is unable to resolve the problem, then the userwill be directed to the appropriate section of the Troubleshooting manualfor further action.9
Introduction  – continued 9-2 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 9-1: Compact BTS Front Panel Layout without Front Panel CoverCCP2 ShelfFanConnector PanelHSO or MSO ModuleHSO Module coverpanel removedNOTE:Front cover panel isnot shown.9
Introduction  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-3DRAFTFigure 9-2: Compact BTS Fan and CCP2 Shelf Layout19MHz EVEN RESET ALARM MMIPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMPWR/ALMRESETGLIACTIVEACTIVEACTIVEACTIVEACTIVEBPR A BPR B AUXMMIMMIMCCcMPCBBXGLICSAPS1LAN A & BConnectionsMCC–DOEthernetConnectionsNOTE:1. HSO or MSO modulesare optional hardwareHSO or MSO(Note 1)LEDSystemStatusIndicatorGROUP 1 SPANDUAL SINGLE LAN A LAN BESDConnectorSPARESYSTEMSTATUSSpare9
Fan Module 9-4 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe fan module is located above the CCP2 Shelf at the front of theCompact BTS.The fan mdoule is a modular device allowing easy replacement. Theelectrical connection for DC power is made through a connector at therear of the module. The connector is automatically engaged when the fanmodule is inserted and seated.System Impact/ConsiderationsAt room temperature, the fan module is very quiet.Operation can be verified by holding a hand over theexhaust grill on top and feeling for air movement.NOTEPerforming this replacement procedure will not causedowntime or interrupt call processing, but it will triggeralarms.IMPORTANT*If a fan begins to degrade or fails, an alarm signal will be sent to theClock Synchronization Alarms card in the CCP2 Shelf.Required ItemsDocumentsNone.ToolsNone.Replacement UnitsOne fan module (STLN6210)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the fan module will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.9
Fan Module  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-5DRAFTUpon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureThis procedure requires working around circuitry that isextremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Weara conductive, high impedance wrist strap during theprocedure.Use appropriate safety measures.CAUTIONIf desired, record the BTS and Fan Module serial number of the failedunit in Table 9-53 at the end of this chapter.Remove Fan ModuleUse the procedure in Table 9-1 to remove the fan module.Table 9-1: Procedure to Remove Fan ModuleStep Action1Notify operator that the fan replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2Put on the ESD wrist strap or another approved grounding device.3If not already done, remove BTS front panel cover by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling simultaneously.4Lower the latch on front of the fan module while gently pulling it forward.5When the fan module is half–way out, support it with the other hand and remove it the rest of the way.  Figure 9-3: Fan Module9
Fan Module  – continued 9-6 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTInstall Fan ModuleUse the procedure in Table 9-2 to install the fan module.Table 9-2: Procedure to Install Fan ModuleStep Action1Put on the ESD wrist strap or another approved grounding device.2Using both hands, set the fan module in the guide channels, and slide module in.3Ensure that fan module seats and front latch engages.4Notify operator that the fan replacement procedure is completed. Have operator verify that old alarmshave cleared and no new alarms are reported.5Install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushing on the top and bottom simultaneously.  9
High and Medium Stability Oscillator ModuleJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-7DRAFTIntroductionThe High Stability and Medium Stability Oscillator  module provide abackup reference source in the case of Global Positioning System (GPS)failure. The HSO is capable of providing up to 24 hours, thesynchronization initially established by the GPS reference signal. TheMSO is capable of providing up to 8 hours.There is only one HSO or MSO equipped in the Compact BTS. Themodule is located in front, behind a cover,  underneath the CCP2 Shelf.The HSO or MSO slides into the top slot of the two that are present.System Impact/ConsiderationsThe HSO or MSO produces a 1 pulse per second (1 pps) clock outputsignal to the CSA.Front Panel IndicatorThe HSO or MSO have no indicators.Required ItemsDocumentsNone.ToolsNone.Replacement UnitsSOne HSO module (SGLA4007)SOne MSO module (SGLA4008)PrerequisiteCoordinate this replacement with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the HSO or MSO module will bereplaced and that alarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.9
High and Medium Stability Oscillator Module  – continued 9-8 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTReplacement ProcedureThis procedure requires working around circuitry that isextremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Weara conductive, high impedance wrist strap during theprocedure.Use appropriate safety measures.CAUTIONIf desired, record the BTS and HSO/MSO serial number of the failedunit in Table 9-54 at the end of this chapter.Remove HSO or MSO ModuleFollow the procedure in Table 9-3 to remove the HSO or MSO module.See Figure 9-4.Table 9-3: Procedure to Remove HSO or MSO ModuleStep Action1Notify operator that the HSO or MSO replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can beexpected.2Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.3If not already done, remove BTS front panel cover  by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling simultaneously.4If not already done,  remove HSO Module cover panel by turning latch, gently pulling it open, andsliding it out towards the right. The panel has a flange that fits into a slot in the frame.5Use a T20 star bit to remove two M4 screws securing HSO or MSO to frame.6Pull on handle to gently slide HSO or MSO out and disconnect cable from side. See Figure 9-5.  Install HSO or MSOFollow the procedure in Table 9-4 to install the HSO or MSO module.Table 9-4: Procedure to Install HSO or MSO ModuleStep Action1Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.* IMPORTANTThe HSO and MSO will only fit into the top slot. DO NOT force it into the lower slot.2Connect cable to rear of HSO or MSO and slide into top slot.3Secure HSO or MSO to frame using two M4 screws. Torque screws to 2.3 N–M (20 in–lbs). table continued on next page9
High and Medium Stability Oscillator Module  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-9DRAFTTable 9-4: Procedure to Install HSO or MSO ModuleStep Action4Install HSO Module cover panel by sliding its flange into the slot, closing, and latching it in place.5Notify operator that the HSO or MSO replacement procedure is completed. Have operator verify thatold alarms have cleared and no new alarms are reported.6Install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushing on the top and bottom simultaneously.  Figure 9-4: HSO or MSO ModuleCable connector9
High and Medium Stability Oscillator Module  – continued 9-10 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTti–cdma–wp–00286–v01–ildoc–ahHSO or MSOFigure 9-5: HSO or MSO Location9
Global Positioning System (GPS) ReceiversJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-11DRAFTIntroductionThe Compact BTS is configured with either Remote or RF GlobalPositioning System (GPS) receiver operation.For Remote GPS operation, the GPS receiver is located in aremotely–located GPS head. This head contains a GPS antenna, GPSreceiver, and digital interface. The GPS receiver output signal from theRGPS head is applied to the Compact BTS. The received signal is routedto the CSA card.System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the GPS head has failed, performing the replacementprocedure will not cause an downtime or interrupt callprocessing as long as an HSO or MSO has been installed.If the HSO or MSO has not been “trained” by the GPS fora minimum of 24 hours, BTS synchronization may not bemaintained for the minimum 24 hours when using the HSOor 8 hours when using the MSO backup.IMPORTANT*Required ItemsDocumentsOptimization chapter this manual.ToolsAppropriate size socket for loosening the pipe/conduit mountinghardware.Replacement UnitOne RGPS head (Motorola P/N 0186012H04)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Replacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and RGPS head serial number of the failedunit in Table 9-55 at the end of this chapter.Remove RGPS HeadFollow the procedure in Table 9-5 to remove the RGPS Head.9
Global Positioning System (GPS) Receivers  – continued 9-12 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-5: Procedure to Remove RGPS HeadStep Action1Notify operator that the RGPS Head replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can beexpected.2Have the OMC–R operator verify the reference source configuration for the CSA.* IMPORTANTBefore removing an RGPS Head that has a working RGPS receiver, have the OMC–R operator verifythat the reference source for the CSA is configured for an HSO or MSO.3Create slack in the RGPS cable so that 0.70 m (2 ft.) of cable extend out of the RGPS Head end of themounting pipe/conduit.NOTETo prevent twisting of cables, do not unscrew or screw RGPS Head while holding the pipe/conduit.4Loosen the pipe/conduit mounting hardware until the pipe/conduit is free to be unscrewed from theRGPS Head.5Grasp the RGPS Head in one hand and the pipe/conduit in the other.Unscrew the pipe/conduit from the head and separate.Grasp the cable just below the head and pull out about 0.5 m (16–inches) of cable out of thepipe/conduit until the mating cable connectors are exposed.NOTEThe CSA will automatically switch over to the HSO or MSO approximately 2 seconds afterdisconnecting a working RGPS Head. Alarms will be triggered at this time.  Install RGPS HeadFollow the procedure in Table 9-6 to install the RGPS Head.Table 9-6: Procedure to Install RGPS HeadStep Action1Connect the cable connector of the replacement RGPS head to the RGPS cable connector.2Feed the cable slack into the RGPS head end of the mounting pipe/conduit.3Grasp the RGPS head in one hand and the pipe/conduit in the other.Being careful not to cross thread the fitting on the RGPS head, screw the pipe/conduit into the head.Hand tighten only!4Tighten the pipe/conduit mounting hardware until the pipe/conduit is securely mounted.5Notify the operator that the replacement procedure has been completed.Have the operator verify that the original alarms have cleared and that no new alarms are reported.  9
Global Positioning System (GPS) Receivers  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-13DRAFTWALL MOUNTINGBRACKETS (2)CLAMP BRACKETS (2)U–BOLTSCABLE TO LIGHTNING ARRESTORTO SITE I/O INTERFACE (CABLE M)REFER TO VIEW A FORCABLING DETAILRGPS HEAD WITH12 PIN MALECONNECTORMATINGCONNECTORSRGPS INTERFACECABLE WITH 12 PINFEMALE CONNECTORON ONE END ANDUNTERMINATED WIREON OTHER ENDVIEW ARGPS HEAD(MOTOROLA PARTNUMBER 0186012H03)1THREADED MOUNT ADAPTER12–PIN DEUTSCH TYPE MMPCONNECTORRGPS HEADCABLE TO LIGHTNINGARRESTOR TO SITE I/OINTERFACE (CABLE M)1–INCH ODTHREADEDCONDUITFigure 9-6: RGPS Head and Mounting Pipe/ConduitNOTE:1.  REPLACEMENT RGPS HEADIS MOTOROLA P/N 0186012H049
RF–GPS Module 9-14 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe RF–GPS Module.System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the RF–GPS is failing or has failed there will be an interruption in callprocessing. The entire site will be down during the replacement of thiscomponent unless an HSO or MSO is in support.The maximum loss of the RF cable CANNOT exceed 15 dB (assuming 25 dB antenna gain).IMPORTANT*Required ItemsDocumentsNoneToolsStar screw driver.Replacement ItemsOne RF–GPS Receiver (SGRG4030)One RF–GPS Kit (CGDSGPSKITF4NM50)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the RF–GPS module will be replacedand that alarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and RF–GPS serial number of the failed unitin Table 9-56 at the end of this chapter.Remove RF–GPSFollow the procedure in Table 9-7 to remove the RF–GPS.9
RF–GPS Module  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-15DRAFTTable 9-7: Procedure to Remove RF–GPSStep Action1Notify operator that the RF–GPS module replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can beexpected.2Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.3At the rear of the BTS, disconnect RF–GPS cable from its SMA connector. See Figure 9-7.4Using a T20 bit, remove four M4 screws securing RF–GPS module to the CBIO Board.5Gently remove RF–GPS module (disconnects it from the RGPS D–connector in the CBIO Board) andplace in/on an anti–static container or surface.  Install RF–GPSFollow the procedure in Table 9-8 to install the RF–GPS.Table 9-8: Procedure to Install RF–GPSStep Action1Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new RF–GPS module from its anti–static container3Remove protective cover from RGPS D–connector.4Install RF–GPS module onto the CBIO Board, by aligning D–connector on bottom of RF–GPSmodule with RGPS D–connector on CBIO Board and gently push down on module. See Figure 9-8.5Using a T20 bit, secure module to CBIO Board with four M4 screws. Torque screws to 2.3 N–M (20in–lbs).6Connect RF–GPS cable to the SMA connector. Torque to 1 N–M (9 in–lbs).7Notify the operator that the replacement procedure is complete.  9
RF–GPS Module  – continued 9-16 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 9-7: RF–GPS ModuleRF–GPS INPWRRFGPS SERIAL NO.RFGPS KIT NO.TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEWSMAConnectorScrew HolesScrew HolesIndicatorRGPSConnector9
RF–GPS Module  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-17DRAFTFigure 9-8:  RF–GPS Placement on CBIO BoardRF–GPS pluggedin and securedwith four screws.RF–GPS INPWRRFGPS SERIAL NO.RFGPS KIT NO.ti–cdma–wp–00311–v01–ildoc–ahEXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUTDAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUTDAISY–CHAIN POWERSDCX POWERSDCX KIT NO.SDCX SERIAL NO.9
Power Supply Module (PSM) 9-18 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the Power Supply Module(PSM). The PSM occupies the first slot in the CCP2 Shelf.System Impact/ConsiderationThe PSM supplies DC power to the cards/modules of the CCP2 Shelf. Ifthe module needed replacing it will cause an interruption in callprocessing.Required ItemsDocumentsNone.ToolsNone.Replacement UnitOne Power Supply Module (STPN4009)The connector keying for the PSM is different for eachversion to prevent using the wrong module.NOTEPrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the PSM will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.When this module is removed, the BTS will shut downbecause power to CCP2 Shelf will be interrupted. It isrecommended that replacing the PSM be performed duringa maintenance window.IMPORTANT*9
Power Supply Module (PSM)  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-19DRAFTReplacement ProcedureThis procedure requires working around circuitry that isextremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Weara conductive, high impedance wrist strap during theprocedure.Use appropriate safety measures.CAUTIONIf desired, record the BTS and PSM serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-57 at the end of this chapter.Remove Power Supply ModuleFollow the procedure in Table 9-9 to remove the Power Supply Module.Table 9-9: Procedure to Remove Power Supply ModuleStep Actionn WARNINGDisengaging the PSM from the CCP2 Shelf will cause the site to be shutdown due to the disruption inpower to the shelf.1Notify operator that the PSM replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2At the front of the BTS, remove the front panel cover  by grasping finger grooves at the top andbottom and pulling simultaneously.3Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.4Simultaneously press the locking tabs on both the top and bottom module latches5Pull the latches out to disengage the module from the shelf and slide the card out.6Place PSM in/on an anti–static container or surface.  Install Power Supply ModuleFollow the procedure in Table 9-10 to install the Power Supply Module.Table 9-10: Procedure to Install Power Supply ModuleStep Action1Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new PSM from its  anti–static container.3Insert module and carefully slide into slot and push in until it is seated in the backplane.4Simultaneously pull both latches forward and slip the tips behind the frame. table continued on next page9
Power Supply Module (PSM)  – continued 9-20 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-10: Procedure to Install Power Supply ModuleStep Action5Push the latches in to engage the module with the backplane and lock the tabs.6Note that the LED turns red briefly, then green.Green indicates that it has passed all self–tests and is functional.7Notify the operator that the replacement procedure has been completed.Have the operator verify that the original alarms have cleared and that no new alarms are reported.8Install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushing on the top and bottom simultaneously.  Figure 9-9: Power Supply Module  (PSM)PWR/ALMPWR/ALM9
Clock Synchronization Alarms CardJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-21DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the Clock SynchronizationAlarms (CSA) card. The CSA occupies the second slot in the CCP2Shelf.System Impact/ConsiderationsThis replacement procedure does require some system downtime. Sincethere is no redundancy, call processing will be interrupted during thetime of the replacement.Required ItemsDocumentsNone.ToolsNoneReplacement ItemOne CSA card.PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the CSA card will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and CSA serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-58 at the end of this chapter.Remove CSA ModuleFollow the procedure in Table 9-11 to remove the CSA card.Table 9-11: Procedure to Remove CSA ModuleStep Actionn WARNINGDisengaging the CSA from the CCP2 Shelf will cause the site to be shutdown due to the disruption inclock timing to the other cards and modules in the BTS.1Notify operator that the CSA card replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected. table continued on next page9
Clock Synchronization Alarms Card  – continued 9-22 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-11: Procedure to Remove CSA ModuleStep Action2Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.3If not already done, remove BTS front panel cover  by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling simultaneously.4Simultaneously press the locking tabs on both the top and bottom card latches5Pull the latches out to disengage the card from the shelf and slide the card out.6Place card in/on an anti–static container or surface.  Install CSA ModuleFollow the procedure in Table 9-12 to install the CSA card.Table 9-12: Procedure to Install CSA ModuleStep Action1Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new CSA card from its  anti–static container.3Insert card and carefully slide into slot and push in until it is seated in the backplane.4Simultaneously pull both latches forward and slip the tips behind the frame.5Push the latches in to engage the card with the backplane and lock the tabs.6The LED illuminates red briefly, then turns green.Green indicates that the module has passed all self–tests and is functional.7Notify the OMC–R operator that the replacement procedure has been completed, and that old alarmsare cleared and no new alarms are reported.8If there are no other actions required, install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushingon the top and bottom simultaneously.  9
Clock Synchronization Alarms Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-23DRAFTFigure 9-10: Clock Synchronization and Alarm CardMMIFrequency MonitorSynchronizationMonitor Status/Alarm LEDMan–MachineInterfaceSTA/ALMFREQ. MONITORSYNC MONITOR9
Group Line Interface Card 9-24 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the Group Line Interface(GLI) 3 card. The GLI3 occupies the third slot in the CCP2 Shelf.System Impact/ConsiderationsAn interruption in call processing will occur if the GLI3 card is failingor fails.PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the GLI3 card will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.When this module is removed, the BTS will shut downbecause card interface and communication will beinterrupted. It is recommended that replacing the GLI3 beperformed during a maintenance window.IMPORTANT*Required ItemsDocumentsThis manual for the optimization and acceptance test procedures.ToolsNoneReplacement ItemOne GLI3 card (SGLN5975)Replacement ProcedureThis procedure requires working around circuitry that isextremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Weara conductive, high impedance wrist strap during theprocedure.Use appropriate safety measures.CAUTION9
Group Line Interface Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-25DRAFTIf desired, record the BTS and GLI3 serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-59 at the end of this chapter.Remove GLI3 CardFollow the procedure in Table 9-13 to remove the GLI3 card.Table 9-13: Procedure to Remove GLI3 CardStep Actionn WARNINGDisengaging the GLI3 from the CCP2 Shelf will cause the site to be shutdown due to the disruption incommnuication with the BBX and MCC cards.1If not already done, remove BTS front panel cover by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling simultaneously.2Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.3Notify operator that the GLI3 card replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.4Simultaneously press the locking tabs on both the top and bottom card latches5Pull the latches out to disengage the card from the shelf and slide the card out.6Place card in/on an anti–static container or surface.  Install GLI3 CardFollow the procedure in Table 9-14 to install the GLI3 card.Table 9-14: Procedure to Install GLI3 CardStep Action1Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new GLI3 card from its  anti–static container.3Insert card and carefully slide into slot and push in until it is seated in the backplane.4Simultaneously pull both latches forward and slip the tips behind the frame.5Push the latches in to engage the card with the backplane and lock the tabs.6Check the STATUS and ALARM LEDs:SThe ALARM LED lights for about 10 seconds while it powers up self–diagnostic test.SThe STATUS LED lights briefly, indicating that the card has passed self diagnostic tests.SBoth LEDs should then remain OFF. table continued on next page9
Group Line Interface Card  – continued 9-26 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-14: Procedure to Install GLI3 CardStep ActionNOTEIf the red ALARM LED remains ON, the card may not be fully seated in the backplane. Pull the cardout about halfway, wait about two minutes before reseating. Perform steps 4 and 5.If the red LED turns back ON after the green LED turns OFF, a new failure condition exists and analarm generated.7Notify operator that the GLI3 replacement procedure is completed. Have operator verify that oldalarms have cleared and no new alarms are reported.8Using the LMF connected to the MMI port, verify that new GLI3 card has the proper configuration.9Proceed to Table 9-15.  GLI3 Recovery ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 9-15 to recover the GLI3 card.Table 9-15: Procedure to Recover GLI3 CardStep Action1At the prompt, enter the following command:omc–00000>ENABLE GLI–<bts#>–<gli#> UNC2Display the status of the GLI by entering the following command:omc–00000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUS3Verify the status of the new GLI3 is INS_ACTIVE.4If there are no other actions required, install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushingon the top and bottom simultaneously.  Optimization RequirementRefer to the Optimization section of this manual and perform therequired procedures.9
Group Line Interface Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-27DRAFTFigure 9-11: Group Line Interface 3 CardBPR ABPR BAUXGLIRESETALARMMMIACTSPANSTA9
Multi–Channel CDMA Card 9-28 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the Multi–Channel CDMA(MCC) cards. The MCC–1X cards occupy the fourth, fifth, and sixthslots (MCC 1, 2, & 3) in the CCP2 Shelf.If the MCC–DO card is in use, proceed to that section for moreinformation later in this chapter.System Impact/ConsiderationsIf an MCC–1X card fails it will cause some interruption in callprocessing in the sense that not all calls will be handled. The otherMCC–1X cards may not be able to handle the additional calls thus callson the failing or failed card will be dropped.If an MCC–1X card must be replaced, it must be ensured that it has thesame number of channels as the card being replaced.MCC Front PanelPWR/ALM LEDThe MCC–1X card has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED. When the LED is:SGreen –– OFF – INS_ACT no alarm.SRed – Power-up or fault condition.Active LEDThe MCC–1X card has circuitry that controls the state of the ActiveLED. When the LED is:SGreen –– Solid – INS_ACT no alarm.– Rapidly Flashing  – OOS_RAM no alarm.– Slowly Flashing – OOS_ROM no alarm.SRed –– Fault condition or card is in reset.– Slow flashing (alternating with green) – CHI bus inactive on powerup.Required ItemsDocumentsNone.ToolsNone.9
Multi–Channel CDMA Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-29DRAFTReplacement ItemsSUp to 3 MCC–1X–16 cards (SGLN6117)SUp to 3 MCC–1X–32 cards (SGLN6050)SUp to 3 MCC–1X–48 cards (SGLN6051)SUp to 3 MCC–1X–64 cards (SGLN6052) (for Packet Backhaul)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the MCC–1X card will be replaced andthat alarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureThis procedure requires working around circuitry that isextremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Weara conductive, high impedance wrist strap during theprocedure.Use appropriate safety measures.CAUTIONIf desired, record the BTS and MCC serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-60 at the end of this chapter.Remove MCC–1X CardFollow the procedure in Table 9-16 to remove the MCC–1X card.Table 9-16: Procedure to Remove MCC–1X CardStep Actionn WARNINGDue to a lack of redundancy, disengaging the MCC cards from the CCP2 Shelf will cause the site to beshutdown due to the disruption in communication with the GLI3.1Notify operator that the MCC replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.3If not  already done, remove BTS front panel cover by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling simultaneously. table continued on next page9
Multi–Channel CDMA Card  – continued 9-30 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-16: Procedure to Remove MCC–1X CardStep Action4Simultaneously press the locking tabs on both the top and bottom card latches5Pull the latches out to disengage the card from the shelf and slide the card out.6Place MCC–1X card on/in an anti–static container or surface.  Install MCC–1X CardFollow the procedure in Table 9-17 to install the MCC–1X card.Table 9-17: Procedure to Install MCC–1X CardStep Action1Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new MCC–1X card from anti–static container.3Slide card into slot and simultaneously pull both latches forward and slip the tips behind the frame.4Push the latches in to engage the card with the backplane and lock the tabs.5Notify operator that the MCC replacement procedure is completed. Have operator verify that oldalarms have cleared and no new alarms are reported.6If there are no other actions required, install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushingon the top and bottom simultaneously.  Optimization RequirementRefer to the Optimization section of this manual and perform therequired procedures.9
Multi–Channel CDMA Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-31DRAFTFigure 9-12: MCC 1X CardPWR/ALM ACTIVEPower/Alarm LEDActive LED9
Broadband Transceiver Card 9-32 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the Broad Band Transceiver1X (BBX–1X) cards.  These cards occupy the seventh and eighth slots(BBX 1 & 4) of the CCP2 Shelf.System Impact/ ConsiderationsThe Compact BTS is not configured for redundancy, so a failure of theBBX card will cause an interruption in call processing. It is still“hot–swappable” like its Macrocell counterparts. Once replacement ismade, optimization procedures will have to be performed.Front PanelThe BBX–1X card contains the PWR/ALM and ACTIVE LED’s, resetswitch and MMI port connector. A removable lens covers these itemsand deters access to the reset switch and MMI port. Refer to Figure 9-13.PWR/ALM LEDThe BBX module has its own alarm (fault) detection circuitry thatcontrols the state of the PWR/ALM LED. When the LED is:SGreen –– Solid – INS_ACT no alarm.– Slowly Flashing – OOS_ROM no alarm.– Rapidly Flashing  – OOS_RAM no alarm.SRed – initializing or power-up or alarm condition.SCombinations– Long red/Short green– OOS_ROM alarm.– Short red/Short green – OOS_RAM alarm.– Long green/Short red – INS_ACT  alarm.SOFF– No DC power– The on–board fuse is open.Active LEDThe BBX module has circuitry that controls the state of the Active LED.When the LED is:SGreen – Operating in INS_ACTIVE state and keyed. No alarmcondition present.SRed –– Color during initial system power–up.– Operating in FAULT (alarm) state. Alarm condition is present.9
Broadband Transceiver Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-33DRAFTRequired itemsDocumentsThis manual for optimization and acceptance test procedures.ToolsNoneReplacement UnitSBBX–1X card (SGLG4044)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the BBX–1X card will be replaced andthat alarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureThis procedure requires working around circuitry that isextremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Weara conductive, high impedance wrist strap during theprocedure.Use appropriate safety measures.CAUTIONIf desired, record the BTS and BBX–1X serial number of the failed unitin Table 9-61 at the end of this chapter. BBX 1 and 4 will be present ifBTS is configured for two carriers; otherwise, only BBX 1 will bepresent.9
Broadband Transceiver Card  – continued 9-34 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTRemove BBX–1X CardFollow the procedure in Table 9-18 to remove the BBX–1X card.Table 9-18: Procedure to Remove BBX–1X CardStep Actionn WARNINGDue to a lack of redundancy, disengaging the BBX card(s) from the CCP2 Shelf will cause the site tobe shutdown due to the disruption in communication with the GLI3 and loss of carrier.1Notify operator that the BBX–1X card replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can beexpected.2Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.3If not already done, remove BTS front panel cover by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling simultaneously.4Simultaneously press the locking tabs on both the top and bottom card latches5Pull the latches out to disengage the card from the shelf and slide the card out.6Place on/in an anti–static container or surface.  Install BBX–1X CardFollow the procedure in Table 9-19 to install the BBX–1X card.Table 9-19: Procedure to Install BBX–1X CardStep Action1Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new BBX–1X card from anti–static container.3Slide card into slot and simultaneously pull both latches forward and slip the tips behind the frame.4Push the latches in to engage the card with the backplane and lock the tabs.5Notify operator that the BBX–1X replacement procedure is completed. Have operator verify that oldalarms have cleared and no new alarms are reported.6If there are no other actions required, install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushingon the top and bottom simultaneously.  Optimization RequirementRefer to the Optimization section of this manual and perform therequired procedures.9
Broadband Transceiver Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-35DRAFTFigure 9-13: BBX–1X CardPWR/ALM ACTIVE9
Compact BTS Multi–Coupler Preselector Card 9-36 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the Multi–Coupler PreselectorCard (cMPC). The cMPC occupies the ninth slot of the CCP2 Shelf.cMPC PWR/ALM LED StatesThe cMPC has a dual color (green & red) power/alarm (PWR/ALM)status indicator LED located on its front panel. The card has its ownalarm (fault) detection circuitry that controls what is displayed on theLED. Table 9-20 lists these states. Refer to Figure 9-14.Table 9-20: cMPC PWR/ALM LED StateLED State Device StateSteady GREEN Operating normallySteady RED 1. Displayed during initialpower– up.2. Operating in a Fault condition.OFF No DC power to card. System Impact/ConsiderationsAn interruption in call processing, due to the RX signal path beingbroken, will occur if the cMPC must be replaced due to total failure ormarginal operation.Required itemsDocumentsThis manual for optimization and acceptance test procedures.ToolsNoneReplacement UnitScMPC (STLF4110)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the Compact MPC will be replaced andthat alarms can be expected.9
Compact BTS Multi–Coupler Preselector Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-37DRAFTUpon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureThis procedure requires working around circuitry that isextremely sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Weara conductive, high impedance wrist strap during theprocedure.Use appropriate safety measures.CAUTIONBefore BeginningIf desired, record the BTS and cMPC serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-62 at the end of this chapter.Remove cMPCFollow the procedure in Table 9-21 to remove the cMPC.Table 9-21: Procedure to Remove cMPCStep Action1Notify operator that the cMPC replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.3If not already done, remove BTS front panel cover  by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling simultaneously.4Simultaneously press the locking tabs on both the top and bottom card latchesPull the latches out to disengage the card from the shelf and slide the card out far enough to disconnectthe RF cabling.* IMPORTANTIf the BTS is set up for 2 PAs, then there will be 6 RF cables (fitted with QMA connectors) todisconnect.Recommend that the cables be disconnected either from top–to–bottom or bottom–to–top.  This willbe important when re–connecting the cables.At the rear of the card the jumper will be connected to the upper of the two RF connections5Cables are labeled and color coded, if not, then tag each cable as it is disconnected.Once cables are disconnected, pull out card.6Place in/on an anti–static container or surface.  Install cMPCFollow the procedure in Table 9-22 to install the cMPC.9
Compact BTS Multi–Coupler Preselector Card  – continued 9-38 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-22: Procedure to Install cMPCStep Action1Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new cMPC from its anti–static container.3Verify that the cMPC is set up for using 1 or 2 Compact PAs. See Figure 9-15.SFor 1 PA, the jumper should be connected to the “Default”   RF connector.SFor 2 PAs, the jumper should be connected to the “Alternate” RF connector.* IMPORTANTTo insert the cMPC with minimum of trouble, make sure the RF cabling is held away towards the sideof the frame in single file and in order they were disconnected.4Insert card and carefully slide into slot far enough to attach cables.Attach RF cables (each cable is labeled and color coded)5Simultaneously pull both latches forward and slip the tips behind the frame.6Push the latches in to engage the card with the backplane and lock the tabs.7Note that the LED turns red briefly, then green.Green indicates that it has passed all self–tests and is functional.8Notify operator that the cMPC replacement procedure is completed. Have operator verify that oldalarms have cleared and no new alarms are reported.9If no other action is needed, install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushing on the topand bottom simultaneously.  9
Compact BTS Multi–Coupler Preselector Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-39DRAFTFigure 9-14: Compact Multi–Coupler Preselector CardPOWER/ALARM LEDPWR/ALM9
Compact BTS Multi–Coupler Preselector Card  – continued 9-40 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 9-15: Compact Multi–Coupler Preselector Card Jumper ConnectionDEFAULTALTERNATECompact MPC shown is set for 1  Power AmplifierP/O cMPC9
MCC Data Only (MCC–DO) CardJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-41DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the MCC Data Only(MCC–DO) card. If in use, this card utilizes MCC slots 1 and 2, withslot 3 containing an MCC–1X card or a filler panel.EV–DO FRU InformationIf there are conflicts between the procedures presented here and thematerial presented in 1xEV–DO Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)Procedures – 68P09257A99,  the manual takes precedence.System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the Multi–Channel CDMA Data Only card fails or is removed fromservice, there will be an interruption in call processing.LED StatesThe MCC–DO card uses four front panel LEDs to indicate its status.Table 9-23 lists the states of the MCC–DO LEDs.Table 9-23: MCC–DO LED StatesLED Color Status SPANGreen ON INS or INS_SBY or INS_ACTPWR/ALM ON Not installed or OOS.Red Blinking Installed in wrong slot.–– OFF OffGreen ON INS_ACTBlinking OOS or INS_SBYRed ON Not Initialized.ACT Blinking Installed in wrong slot.Orange ON INS–– OFF OffRed ON Major alarms on a provisioned span.SPAN Orange ON Minor alarms on a provisioned span.Green ON No alarms on a provisioned span.–– OFF No Provisioned span.Orange ON Both ENET and TAT links are up.ENET Green ON Either ENET or TAT link is up.table continued on next page9
MCC Data Only (MCC–DO) Card  – continued 9-42 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-23: MCC–DO LED StatesLED SPANStatusColor–– OFF Both ENET and TAT link are down.NOTE:  In the case of some spans on a given MCC–DO having Yellow alarms, and otherspans having Red alarms, a Red Alarm state should be indicated. Required ItemsDocumentsNone.ToolsNone.Replacement ItemsOne MCC–Data Only card (SGLN6146)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the MCC–DO card will be replaced andthat alarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and MCC–DO serial number of the failed unitin Table 9-63 at the end of this chapter.Remove MCC–DO CardFollow the procedure in Table 9-24 to remove the MCC–DO card.Table 9-24: Procedure to Remove MCC–DO CardStep Actionn WARNINGDisengaging the MCC–DO card from the CCP2 Shelf will cause the site to be shutdown due to thedisruption in signal processing.1Notify operator that the MCC–DO card replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can beexpected. table continued on next page9
MCC Data Only (MCC–DO) Card  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-43DRAFTTable 9-24: Procedure to Remove MCC–DO CardStep Action2Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.3If not already done, remove BTS front panel cover  by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling simultaneously.4If not already done, label cables prior  to disconnecting them from front panel connectors.5Simultaneously press the locking tabs on both the top and bottom card latches6Pull the latches out to disengage the card from the shelf and slide the card out.7Place in/on an anti–static container or surface.  Install MCC–DO CardFollow the procedure in Table 9-25 to install the MCC–DO card.Table 9-25: Procedure to Install MCC–DO CardStep Action1Put on the ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new MCC–DO card from anti–static container.3Slide card into slot and simultaneously pull both latches forward and slip the tips behind the frame.4Push the latches in to engage the card with the backplane and lock the tabs.5Note that the PWR/ALM LED turns red briefly, then green.Green indicates that it has passed all self–tests and is functional.6Connect cabling to front panel connectors.7Notify operator that the MCC–DO replacement procedure is completed. Have operator verify that oldalarms have cleared and no new alarms are reported.8If there are no other actions required, install BTS front panel cover by setting it in place and pushingon the top and bottom simultaneously.  9
MCC Data Only (MCC–DO) Card  – continued 9-44 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 9-16: MCC–DO CardNOTE:1. The DO card physically occupiesMCC slots 1 & 2, but only plugs intoone backplane connectorENETACTMMI ENETTATGRP3SPANGRP2SPANGRP1SPANSINGLEDUALSPANPWR/ALM RESET9
Compact BTS Input and Output BoardJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-45DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe Compact BTS Input and Output (CBIO) Board.System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the CBIO board is failing or has failed there will be an interruption incall processing. The entire site will be down for replacement of thiscomponent.CBIO IndicatorsThe CBIO Board has six indicators that provide status of severalcomponents of the BTS. The six LEDs are +28V, +15V, HSO, MOD,+5V, and ISO.+28V LEDThe +28V LED indicates the status of the DC power that is supplied tothe Remote GPS or the RF GPS module.  This LED will come on afterthe CSA initializes.  When the CSA is trying to determine the cabledelay, this LED will go OFF and ON, but it should stay ON once thedelay is successfully completed.  If the LED remains OFF, it mayindicate a problem with either the RGPS or RF GPS, or the CSA FRU.+15V LEDThe +15V LED indicates the status of the DC power that is coming fromthe DC–DC converter module to the CBIO Board.  This LED shouldalways be ON, unless there is a blown fuse on the CBIO Board.HSO LEDThe HSO LED indicates the status of the DC power that is supplied tothe HSO or MSO module.  This LED will be OFF, if the HSO or MSOis not connected; otherwise, it is ON. Faulty operation of the LED maybe related to problems with the main +15V supply to the CBIO Board,also indicated by the +15V LED.MOD LEDThe MOD LED indicates the status of the DC power that is supplied tothe modem module.  However, this LED is not dependent on whether themodem module is plugged in or not, and should be always ON.  If theCBIO +5V supply is okay, then the LED being OFF could indicate aproblem with the modem module, the wiring, or a resettable fuse on theCBIO Board.+5V LEDThe +5V LED indicates the status of the DC power that is coming fromthe DC–DC converter module to the CBIO Board.  This LED shouldalways be ON, unless there is a blown fuse on the CBIO Board.9
Compact BTS Input and Output Board  – continued 9-46 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTISO LEDThe ISO LED indicates the status of the isolated DC voltage that is usedfor the customer inputs.  This LED should always be ON, if the +5Vsupply to the CBIO Board is okay.  If the LED is OFF, it indicates aproblem on the CBIO Board.Required ItemsDocumentsNoneToolsScrewdriver with T20 star bitReplacement ItemsOne CBIO Board.PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the CBIO will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and CBIO Board serial number of the failedunit in Table 9-64 at the end of this chapter.Remove CBIO BoardFollow the procedure in Table 9-26 to remove the CBIO Board.To perform the following procedure, the BTS must beremoved from the Mounting Plate.NOTETable 9-26: Procedure to Remove CBIO BoardStep Action1Notify operator that the CBIO Board replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can beexpected.2 Perform the Site Shutdown procedure in Table 10-2. table continued on next page9
Compact BTS Input and Output Board  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-47DRAFTTable 9-26: Procedure to Remove CBIO BoardStep Actionn WARNINGBy pulling out the circuit breaker, power to the BTS will be interrupted, causing the BTS to go offline.3Disengage DC power to the BTS by pulling out the 20 A breaker at the rear of the BTS.4If possible, turn off DC power at the source. Verify that DC power source is OFF.5Disconnect all cabling to the BTS.6Put on the ESD wrist strap.7At the rear of the BTS, remove the four M4 screws securing the SDCX or SDCX cover plate to theCBIO Board.  Gently remove SDCX module from the CBIO connector or SDCX cover plate.8Use a driver with a T20 star bit to remove 6 M4 screws securing CBIO to housing. See Figure 9-17.* IMPORTANTDO NOT yank out the CBIO Board, there are cables connected at the bottom rear side of the board.9Grasp holes and gently pull on CBIO Board to disengage it from the backplane. See Figure 9-17.Note that there are internal cables connected at the bottom.10 If not already done, label internal cables before disconnecting them.11 Remove CBIO Board and place in an anti–static container.  Install CBIO BoardFollow the procedure in Table 9-27 toinstall the CBIO Board.Table 9-27: Procedure to Install CBIO BoardStep Action1Put on the ESD wrist strap.2If not already done,  remove CBIO Board from its anti–static container.3Set CBIO Board onto rear of BTS and connect the internal cables, in the same order as previouslyconnected.4Carefully align the CBIO panel to the frame and gently seat the CBIO connector into the backplaneconnector.5Once aligned, with one hand grasp BTS and with the other hand gently push the CBIO until it sets upagainst the housing.6Use a driver with a T20 star bit to secure the CBIO to the frame using 6 M4 screws. Torque screws to2.3 N–M (20 in–lbs).  See Figure 9-17.7Install SDCX or SDCX cover plate and secure to CBIO using 4 M4 screws. Torque screws to 2.3N–M (20 in–lbs). table continued on next page9
Compact BTS Input and Output Board  – continued 9-48 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-27: Procedure to Install CBIO BoardStep Action8Disengage from the ESD wrist strap.9Connect all external cabling.10 Verify that DC power source is OFF before re–connecting to the BTS.Turn on DC power source.11 Notify the operator know that the replacement procedure is completed, and that power up will beginshortly.12 Allow the BTS to power up by pushing in the 20 A circuit breaker at the rear of the BTS.13 Perform the Site Startup procedure in Table 10-5.14 Perform an optimization of the cards, using the procedures in the Optimization/ATP section of thismanual.15 After BTS is optimized and is operating within normal parameters, install the BTS front cover panelby setting it in place and pushing on the top and bottom simultaneously.16 Notify operator that optimization is complete.  9
Compact BTS Input and Output Board  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-49DRAFTFigure 9-17: CBIO Board with SDCX Removedti–cdma–wp–00311–v01–ildoc–ahRF–GPD INPWRScrews toremoveScrews toremoveScrew toremoveScrew toremoveGrasp holeswith forefingerand thumb.SDCX Board orCover PlateRemoved9
SDCX  Module 9-50 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe Synchronization Daisy–Chaining and eXpansion (SDCX) Module.System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the SDCX fails it will cause a disruption in call processing byupsetting the timing of the BTSs.Required ItemsDocumentsNoneToolsStar screw driver.Replacement ItemsOne SDCX Module (SGLN6153)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the SDCX module will be replaced andthat alarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and SDCX serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-65 at the end of this chapter.Remove SDCXFollow the procedure in Table 9-28 to remove the SDCX Module.Table 9-28: Procedure to Remove SDCXStep Action1Notify operator that the SDCX Module replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can beexpected.2Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device. table continued on next page9
SDCX  Module  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-51DRAFTTable 9-28: Procedure to Remove SDCXStep Action3Disconnect all cables from SDCX Module.4At the rear of the BTS, use a T20 screw driver to remove four M4 screws securing SDCX Module tothe CBIO Board. See Figure 9-19.5Gently remove SDCX Module (disconnect it from the SDCX connector in the CBIO Board), and placeit in/on an anti–static container or surface.  Install SDCXFollow the procedure in Table 9-29 to install the SDCX.Table 9-29: Procedure to Install SDCXStep Action1Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.2If not already done, remove new SDC Module from its anti–static container3Install SDCX module onto the CBIO Board.4Align connector on bottom of SDCX Module with connector on on CBIO Board and gently pushdown on module. See Figure 9-20.5Secure module to CBIO Board using four M4 screws. Torque screws to 2.3 N–M (20 in–lbs).6Notify the operator know that the replacement procedure is complete.  9
SDCX  Module  – continued 9-52 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 9-18: SDCX ModuleBOTTOM VIEWConnectorPlugExpansion SDCConnectorsRGPSTAILConnectorUsed only if the site isconfigured for multiple BTSs.9
SDCX  Module  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-53DRAFTFigure 9-19: CBIO Board with SDCX13003_001CRemovescrewsRemovescrewsDAISY–CHAIN SYNC – OUTSDCX KIT NO.SDCX SERIAL NO.DAISY–CHAIN POWERSDCX POWEREXPANSION FRAME SYNC – OUTRF–GPS INPWR2525A9
SDCX  Module  – continued 9-54 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 9-20: CBIO Board with SDCX RemovedSDCX Boardconnectorti–cdma–wp–00311–v01–ildoc–ahRF–GPD INPWR25A 259
RF Filter TrayJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-55DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe RF Filter Tray.System Impact/ConsiderationsIf either of the filters on the tray is failing or has failed there will be aninterruption in call processing. The entire site will be down forreplacement of this component.Required ItemsDocumentsNoneToolsScrewdriver with T20 star bitReplacement ItemsS1.9 GHz Filter Kit – 0 cCLPA (SGLN6221)S1.9 GHz Filter Kit – 1 cCLPA (SGLN6220)S1.9 GHz Filter Kit – 2 cCLPA (SGLN6219)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the Filter Tray will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and Filter Tray serial number of the failed unitin Table 9-66 at the end of this chapter.If the BTS is in an outdoor configuration, perform Table 9-51, RemoveTME. The BTS removal is embedded in the procedure.Remove Filter TrayFollow the procedure in Table 9-30 to remove the Filter Tray.9
RF Filter Tray  – continued 9-56 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTo perform the following procedure, the BTS must beremoved from the Mounting Plate.NOTETable 9-30: Preparation Procedure for Removing the Filter TrayStep Action1Notify operator that the Filter Kit replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2Perform the Site Shutdown procedure in Table 10-2.3Remove 3 M6 screws and washers securing BTS to Mounting Plate.n WARNINGBy pulling out the circuit breaker, power to the BTS will be interrupted, causing the BTS to go offline.4Disengage DC power to the BTS by pulling out the 20 A breaker at the rear of the BTS.5If possible, turn off DC power at the source. Verify that DC Power source is OFF.6Disconnect all cabling to the BTS.7Remove BTS from Mounting Plate and place on a stable, flat surface.8Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device.Ensure wrist strap is properlygrounded. Do not ground to BTS chassis.9If not already done, remove BTS front cover panel  by grasping finger grooves at the top and bottomand pulling.10 Pull out all the circuit cards and modules.11 If not already done,  remove HSO Module cover panel by turning latch, gently pulling it open, andsliding it out towards the right. The panel has a flange that fits into a slot in the chassis.12 Reach fingers in along the right side and feel for the clip that holds on the lower front right side ventpanel, and pop out the panel.13 Using the hole left by the front right side vent panel, reach fingers in along the divider and press onthe clip holding the rear right side vent panel and pop it out.14 If the BTS is equipped with Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221, proceed to Table 9-31.If the BTS is equipped with Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220, proceed to  Table 9-35.If the BTS is equipped with Filter Tray Kit SGLN6219, proceed to Table 9-37.  Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221Removal ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 9-31 to remove the Filter Tray.9
RF Filter Tray  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-57DRAFTTable 9-31: Procedure to Remove Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221Step Action1Perform the preparation procedure described in Table 9-30.2Using a screwdriver with T20 star bit, remove two screws securing the Filter Tray Assembly to thechassis.3Disconnect the RF cables (Input) in the following order:– RX MAIN connector (blue)RX DIV connector (green)RX RFL–MAIN connector (blue)RX RFL–DIV connector (green)RX FWD–DIV connector (green)4Hold cables to one side and slide out filter tray to expose cables attached to rear connector (Output) ofeach filter.5Disconnect RX MAIN cable (blue).6Disconnect RX DIV cable (green).7Remove Filter Tray completely.  cMPC Cable Clip RemovalProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 9-32 to remove the cMPC cable clip. ThecMPC cable clip is located just inside the front of the BTS, on the CCP2shelf on the right side (looking into the BTS).Table 9-32: Procedure to Remove cMPC Cable ClipStep ActionNOTEcMPC cable clip only needs to be removed if filter tray is not replaced with the same type. Clipremoval is to accommodate other filter tray configurations or cable replacement.1Using a small, flat blade screwdriver, reach in and simultaneously lift tab and push towards the frontof the BTS. See Figure 9-21.2Using thumb and forefinger grasp tab (narrow end), and pull up and towards rear to pop out clip.3Remove clip and place a side.4Remove the RX MAIN (blue) and RX DIV (green) cables.   9
RF Filter Tray  – continued 9-58 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 9-21: cMPC Cable ClipSLOT1 SLOT6TOWARDSFRONT OF BTSTOWARDSREAR OF BTScMPC Cable Clip InstallationProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 9-33 to install the cMPC cable clip.Table 9-33: Procedure to Install cMPC Cable ClipStep Action1Properly position cables in clip (order defined in installation procedure).2Insert clip by sliding in wide flange end in first (towards front of BTS)3Using a thumb, press on clip and push towards rear, slipping clip into place.4Route cables inside BTS towards filter tray.5Return to filter tray installation procedure.  Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221Follow the procedure in Table 9-34 to install the Filter Tray. Refer toFigure 9-22.Table 9-34: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221Step Action1Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device. Ensure that wrist strap is properlygrounded.NOTEDo not attach ESD wrist strap to BTS chassis.2If not already installed, the following cables must be installed:– RX RFL–MAIN (blue)– RX RFL–DIV (green)– RX FWD–DIV (green)3Remove the CBIO Board by performing the procedure described in Table 9-26. table continued on next page9
RF Filter Tray  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-59DRAFTTable 9-34: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221Step Action4Connect cables to the RFL–MAIN, RFL–DIV, and FWD–DIV connectors at the inside rear of theBTS, respectively. Use a 5/16–in wrench to secure cables to connectors. Torque to 1 N–M.NOTECables have two heat shrink sleeves with a slight separation between them. The cMPC cable clipslides into this separation to hold the cables in place.5Install RX MAIN and RX DIV cables as follows:– Ensuring the cable is on the inside of BTS, place RX DIV (green) cable into slot 1 of cMPC cableclip (Connector labeled RX DIV faces towards the front of BTS)– Place RX MAIN (blue) cable into slot 2 of cMPC cable clip (Connector labeled RX MAIN facestowards the front of BTS).– Place (red) cable into slot 5.– Place (black) cable into slot 6.6Perform Table 9-33 to install the cMPC cable clip. (If it had been removed.)7Set Filter Tray on the edge of its slot and connect the RX MAIN (blue) and RX DIV (green) cables tothe output connector at the rear of their respective filters. See Figure 9-22.8Slide Filter Tray into BTS chassis and secure using 2 M4 screws. Torque to 2.3 N–M (20 in–lbs).9Connect the following cables:– RX MAIN (blue) to RX MAIN  input– RX DIV (green) to RX DIV input– RX RFL–MAIN (blue) to  RFL–MAIN input– RX RFL–DIV (green) to RFL–DIV input– RX FWD–DIV (green) to FWD–DIV inputSee Figure 9-22.10 Use tie–wraps to dress cables as necessary.11 Install the rear right side vent panel. Ensure that the clip end faces the front of the BTS or towards theleft.12 Install the front right side vent panel. Ensure that the clip end faces the front of the BTS or towards theleft.13 Make sure the vent panels are flush with the side of the BTS.14 Install CBIO Board following the procedure in Table 9-27.15 Install circuit cards and modules, ensure they are seated properly.16 Install HSO Module cover panel by sliding its flange into the slot, closing, and latching it in place.17 Disengage from the ESD wrist strap.18 Set the BTS on the Mounting Plate and secure using 3 M6 screws and isolation washers. Torque to 5N–M (44 in–lbs). table continued on next page9
RF Filter Tray  – continued 9-60 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-34: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6221Step Action19 Connect all external cabling.20 Verify that DC power source is OFF before re–connecting to the BTS.Turn on DC power source.21 Notify the operator know that the replacement procedure is completed, and that power up will beginshortly.22 Allow the BTS to power up by pushing in the 20 A circuit breaker at the rear of the BTS.23 Perform the Site Startup procedure in Table 10-5.24 Perform an optimization of the cards, using the procedures in the Optimization/ATP section of thismanual.25 After BTS is optimized, and it is operating within normal parameters, install the BTS front coverpanel by setting it in place and pushing on the top and bottom simultaneously.26 Notify operator that optimization is complete.  9
RF Filter Tray  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-61DRAFTFigure 9-22: Filter Tray Connectors and Cable Part Numbers (SGLN6221)RX DIVCable PN 3086617X05RFL–MAINCable PN3086617X07RX MAINCable PN3086617X04FWD–DIVCable PN3086617X18RFL–DIVCable PN 3086617X08Front ViewInput ConnectorsRear ViewOutput ConnectorsRX DIVCable PN 3086617X02 RX MAINCable PN 3086617X03Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220Removal ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 9-35 to remove the Filter Tray Kit.Table 9-35: Procedure to Remove Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220Step Action1Perform the preparation procedure described in Table 9-30.2Using a screwdriver with T20 star bit, remove two screws securing the Filter Tray Assembly to thechassis. table continued on next page9
RF Filter Tray  – continued 9-62 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-35: Procedure to Remove Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220Step Action3Disconnect the RF cables (Input) in the following order:– RX MAIN connector (blue) from RX MAIN connectorRX DIV connector (green)RX RFL–DIV connector (green)RX FWD–DIV connector (green)See Figure 9-234Hold cables to one side and slide out filter tray to expose cable attached to rear connector (Output) ofthe RX DIV filter.5Disconnect RX DIV (Output) cable (green).6Remove Filter Tray completely.  Figure 9-23: Filter Tray Connectors and Cable Part Numbers (SGLN6220)RX DIVCable PN 3086617X05RX MAIN(from input)Cable PN3086617X35 FWD–DIVCable PN3086617X18RFL–DIVCable PN 3086617X08Front ViewInput ConnectorsRX MAIN(from output)Cable PN3086617X04RX DIVCable PN 3086617X02Rear ViewOutput Connector9
RF Filter Tray  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-63DRAFTInstall Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220Follow the procedure in Table 9-36 to install the Filter Tray. Refer toFigure 9-22.Table 9-36: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220Step Action1Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device. Ensure that wrist strap is properlygrounded.NOTEDo not attach grounding devices to BTS chassis.2If the filter tray to be installed is different from the one removed, proceed to the appropriate filter trayinstallation procedure. Otherwise, proceed to step 5.3If not already installed, the following cables must be installed:– RX RFL–DIV (green)– RX FWD–DIV (green)4Remove the CBIO Board by performing the procedure described in Table 9-26.5Connect cables to the RFL–DIV and FWD–DIV connectors, respectively. Use a 5/16–in wrench tosecure cables to connectors. Torque to 1 N–M.NOTECables have two heat shrink sleeves with a slight separation between them. The cMPC cable clipslides into this separation to hold the cables in place.6Install RX MAIN and RX DIV cables as follows:– Ensuring the cable is on the inside of BTS, place RX DIV (green) cable into slot 1 of cMPCcableclip (Connector labeled RX DIV faces towards the front of BTS)– Place RX MAIN (blue) cable into slot 2 of cMPC cable clip (Connector labeled RX MAIN facestowards the front of BTS).– Place (red) cable into slot 5.– Place (black) cable into slot 6.7Perform Table 9-33 to install the cMPC cable clip.8Set new Filter Tray into its slot and connect the input RX MAIN (blue) directly to output RX MAINcable. Connect RX DIV (green) cable to the output connector at the rear of the RX DIV filter. See .9Slide Filter Tray into BTS chassis and secure using 2 M4 screws. Torque to 2.3 N–M (20 in–lbs).10 Connect the following cables:– RX DIV (green) to RX DIV input– RX RFL–DIV (green) to RFL–DIV input– RX FWD–DIV (green) to FWD–DIV inputSee Figure 9-23.11 Use tie–wraps to dress cables as necessary. table continued on next page9
RF Filter Tray  – continued 9-64 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-36: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6220Step Action12 Install the rear right side vent panel. Ensure that the clip end faces the front of the BTS or towards theleft.13 Install the front right side vent panel. Ensure that the clip end faces the front of the BTS or towards theleft.14 Make sure the vent panels are flush with the side of the BTS.15 Install CBIO Board following the procedure in Table 9-27.16 Install circuit cards and modules, ensure they are seated properly.17 Install HSO Module cover panel by sliding its flange into the slot, closing, and latching it in place.18 Disengage from the ESD wrist strap.19 Set the BTS on the Mounting Plate and secure using 3 M6 screws and isolation washers. Torque to 5N–M (44 in–lbs).20 Connect all external cabling.21 Verify that DC power source is OFF before re–connecting to the BTS.Turn on DC power source.22 Notify the operator know that the replacement procedure is completed, and that power up will beginshortly.23 Allow the BTS to power up by pushing in the 20 A circuit breaker at the rear of the BTS.24 Perform the Site Startup procedure in Table 10-5.25 Perform an optimization of the cards, using the procedures in the Optimization/ATP section of thismanual.26 After BTS is optimized, and it is operating within normal parameters, install the BTS front coverpanel by setting it in place and pushing on the top and bottom simultaneously.27 Notify operator that optimization is complete.  Filter Tray Kit SGLN6219Removal ProcedureFollow the procedure in Table 9-37 to remove the Filter Tray Kit.9
RF Filter Tray  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-65DRAFTTable 9-37: Procedure to Remove Filter Tray Kit SGLN6219Step Action1Perform the preparation procedure described in Table 9-30.2Disconnect the cables in the following order:– RX MAIN connector (X35, blue) from RX MAIN (X04, blue) connectorRX DIV connector (X36, green) from RX DIV (X05, green) connectorSee Figure 9-24.3Remove cMPC cable clip per Table 9-32, if necessary  Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6219Follow the procedure in Table 9-38 to install the Filter Tray.Table 9-38: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6222 or SGLN6219Step Action1Put on an ESD wrist strap or other approved grounding device. Ensure that wrist strap is properlygrounded.NOTEDo not attach ESD wrist strap to BTS chassis.2If the filter tray to be installed is different from the one removed, proceed to the appropriate filter trayinstallation procedure. Otherwise, proceed to step 5.NOTECables have two heat shrink sleeves with a slight separation between them. The cMPC cable clipslides into this separation to hold the cables in place.3Install RX MAIN and RX DIV cables as follows:– Ensuring the cable is on the inside of BTS, place RX DIV (green) cable into slot 1 of cMPC cableclip (Connector labeled RX DIV faces towards the front of BTS)– Place RX MAIN (blue) cable into slot 2 of cMPC cable clip (Connector labeled RX MAIN facestowards the front of BTS).– Place (red) cable into slot 5.– Place (black) cable into slot 6.See Figure 9-24.4Perform Table 9-33 to install the cMPC cable clip. (If it had been removed.)5Connect the input RX MAIN (blue) directly to output RX MAIN cable. Connect input RX DIV(green) directly to the output RX DIV cable6Use tie–wraps to dress cables as necessary.7Install the rear right side vent panel. Ensure that the clip end faces the front of the BTS or towards theleft. table continued on next page9
RF Filter Tray  – continued 9-66 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-38: Procedure to Install Filter Tray Kit SGLN6222 or SGLN6219Step Action8Install the front right side vent panel. Ensure that the clip end faces the front of the BTS or towards theleft.9Make sure the vent panels are flush with the side of the BTS.10 Install circuit cards and modules, ensure they are seated properly.11 Install HSO Module cover panel by sliding its flange into the slot, closing, and latching it in place.12 Disengage from the ESD wrist strap.13 Set the BTS on the Mounting Plate and secure using 3 M6 screws and isolation washers. Torque to 5 N–M (44 in–lbs).14 Connect all external cabling.15 Verify that DC power source is OFF before re–connecting to the BTS.Turn on DC power source.16 Notify the operator know that the replacement procedure is completed, and that power up will beginshortly.17 Allow the BTS to power up by pushing in the 20 A circuit breaker at the rear of the BTS.18 Perform the Site Startup procedure in Table 10-5.19 Perform an optimization of the cards, using the procedures in the Optimization/ATP section of thismanual.20 After BTS is optimized, and it is operating within normal parameters, install the BTS front coverpanel by setting it in place and pushing on the top and bottom simultaneously.21 Notify operator that optimization is complete.  Figure 9-24: Filter Tray Connectors and Cable Part Numbers (SGLN6219)RX MAIN (from input)Cable PN 3086617X35Front ViewInput ConnectorsRX MAIN (from output)Cable PN 3086617X04 RX DIV (from input)Cable PN 3086617X36RX DIV (from output)Cable PN 3086617X059
Compact Combined Linear Power AmplifierJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-67DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier (cCLPA).System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the cCLPA is failing or has failed there will be an interruption in callprocessing. While the BTS itself may be operational, there may not bereception or transmission depending on the fault.Required ItemsDocumentsNoneToolsScrewdriver with T20 star bitReplacement ItemS+27 VDC A Band (STTF4024)S+27 VDC B Band (STTF4025)S+27VDC 1.9 GHz (STTG4031)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the Filter Tray will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and cCLPA serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-67 at the end of this chapter.Remove cCLPAFollow the procedure in Table 9-39 to remove the cCLPA.Table 9-39: Procedure to Remove cCLPAStep Action1Notify operator that the cCLPA replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2Have OMC–R operator disable the cCLPA and the associated BBX card(s). table continued on next page9
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier  – continued 9-68 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-39: Procedure to Remove cCLPAStep Action3Turn off DC power to the cCLPA. For Outdoor configuration disengage the PDE circuit breaker to thecCLPA being removed.4Use a screwdriver with a T20 star bit to remove 8 screws securing I/O Board cover to the cCLPA.5Loosen screws securing DC power to the I/O Board DC connector.6Disconnect BTS Data Cable from the I/O Board.7Disconnect ground cable from the cCLPA.8Remove 4 M6 screws securing cCLPA to the rack.9Loosen 2 M6 screws securing cCLPA flange to the rack enough to safely remove the cCLPA.10 Lift cCLPA up and away from the rack.  Install cCLPAFollow the procedure in Table 9-40 to install the cCLPA.Table 9-40: Procedure to Install cCLPAStep Action1Lift cCLPA up and hang on two screws. Ensure that all screw holes align, then tighten screws toflange.2Install 4 M6 screws and secure cCLPA to rack.3Connect ground cable to cCLPA.4Route BTS Data Cable through cCLPA DATA opening and connect to RJ45 connector on cCLPA I/OBoard.5Route DC power cable through DC IN opening and insert in DC Power terminal board. Ensure that the“–” wire goes to –48V and the “+” wire goes to 0V locations. Tighten the screws to secure the wires inplace.6Install I/O Board cover panel and use a screwdriver with a T20 star bit to secure it to cCLPA using 8M6 screws.7On cCLPA, pull out 20A circut breaker.8Turn on cCLPA DC power source.9Allow the cCLPA to power up by pushing in the 20 A circuit breaker.10 Notify OMC–R operator that the cCLPA replacement procedure is completed.11 Have OMC–R operator enable cCLPA and associated BBX card(s) that were taken out–of–service andverify that there are no new alarms.  9
Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifier  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-69DRAFTFigure 9-25: Compact Combined Linear Power Amplifierti–cdma–wp–00300–v01–ildoc–ah9
TME Power Distribution Assembly 9-70 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe TME Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the PDA is failing or has failed there will be an interruption in callprocessing. Power to the BTS and 1U unit will be interrupted.Required ItemsDocumentsNoneToolsSScrewdriver with T20 star bitSTorque Driver  Wrench or Torque Ratchet WrenchSSocket, 8 mm, 3/8–in or 1/4–inSFlat head or Phillips head screw driverReplacement ItemSPDA (STHN4066A)PrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the PDA will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.9
TME Power Distribution Assembly  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-71DRAFTFigure 9-26: PDA Locationti–cdma–wp–00262–v03–ildoc–ahPDAReplacement ProcedureIf desired, record the BTS and PDA serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-68 at the end of this chapter.Remove PDAFollow the procedure in Table 9-41 to remove the PDA. See Figure 9-26or Figure 9-27.Table 9-41: Procedure to Remove PDAStep Action1Notify operator that the PDA replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2Disengage circuit breakers setting to “O” position.3Turn off DC power to the PDA.4On PDA disconnect power plug from connector.  Proceed to step 6.5Use a screwdriver to loosen screws securing DC power wires to PDA.6Use a wrench to remove two nuts and washers securing ground lug to the PDA.7Loosen captive screws securing PDA to TME chassis. table continued on next page9
TME Power Distribution Assembly  – continued 9-72 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-41: Procedure to Remove PDAStep Action8Gently pull out PDA far enough to disconnect cables at the rear.9Remove PDA.  Install PDAFollow the procedure in Table 9-42 to install the PDA. See Figure 9-26or Figure 9-27.Table 9-42: Procedure to Install PDAStep Action1Hold PDA near its slot in the TME and connect the cables (previously disconnected) to the rear of thePDA.2Slide PDA in and secure to TME chassis by tightening the captive screws.3Place ground lug on ground studs of the PDA and secure using two M6 nuts and washers. Torque nutsto 3.4 N–M (30 in–lbs).4Verify that circuit breakers are disengaged (pulled out or set to “O” position).5Verify that DC power source is OFF.6Connect +27 V power plug.7Turn on DC power.8On PDA, set circuit breaker switch to “1” position.9Push in 1U circuit breaker.10 Notify operator that replacement is complete and verify that no new alarms have been generated andthat old alarms are cleared.  9
TME Power Distribution Assembly  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-73DRAFTFigure 9-27: Power Distribution AssemblyCaptiveScrewCaptiveScrewFRONTti–cdma–wp–00348–v01–ildoc–ahti–cdma–wp–00346–v01–ildoc–ahREARGroundLocation1UCircuitBreakerTME CircuitBreaker(Rocker Style)TME Door AlarmConnectionBTS / 1UConnectionHMSConnection+27 VDCConnectorSocket9
Heat Management System 9-74 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe Heat Management System (HMS)System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the HMS is failing or has failed there will be an interruption in callprocessing. It is recommended that power be disengaged from the TME.Required ItemsDocumentsNoneToolsSScrewdriver with T20 star bitSTorque Driver  Wrench or Torque Ratchet WrenchSSocket, 10 mm, 3/8–in or 1/4–inReplacement ItemSHMSSHeater ElementsSBlower FanSHMS ControllerPeriodic MaintenanceThe louvers over the HMS intake fan need to be inspected and cleaned inorder to ensure proper operation of the TME/BTS. A vacuum cleaner orsoft bristle brush is recommended to clean the louvers.The condition of the louvers must be monitored.  Therecommended service interval is every 90 days, barring anyprevious inspections. Once environmental conditions at thesite are established by inspection, it is possible thatcleaning intervals may need to be adjusted to more or lessthan the nominal 90 day interval.NOTEPrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*9
Heat Management System  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-75DRAFTContact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the HMS or its components will bereplaced and that alarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Figure 9-28:Heat Management Systemti–cdma–wp–00337–v01–ildoc–ahBlower(Behind Louvers)HMSControllerHeaterElementsReplacement ProcedureIf desired, record the TME and HMS serial number of the failed unit inTable 9-69 at the end of this chapter.Remove HMSFollow the procedure in Table 9-43 to remove the HMS. SeeFigure 9-28.9
Heat Management System  – continued 9-76 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-43: Procedure to Remove HMSStep Action1Notify operator that the HMS replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2Turn off DC power to the TME.3Unlock and remove external lock4Use key to unlock HMS draw latch door.5Turn latches and slowly swing open HMS.! CAUTIONBe aware of the heater elements, they will be hot to the touch if they have been in recent use.Removing the HMS exposes the interior of the TME to the elements, cover the opening with ablanket, towel, tarp, card board, or equivalent item.6Use an driver wrench with socket to remove two M6 nuts and washers securing ground lug to HMSdoor. Disconnect DC power and HMS controller cable from HMS Controller.7Remove HMS and place on a flat surface, preferably a table of bench top.! CAUTIONBe careful not to damage louvers protecting Blower Fan.  Install HMSFollow the procedure in Table 9-44 to re–install the HMS.Table 9-44: Procedure to Re–install HMSStep Action1Carefully lift HMS and set on TME hinge pins.2Place ground lug on ground studs of the HMS and secure using two M6 nuts and washers. Torque nutsto 3.4 N–M (30 in–lbs).3Connect DC Power and HMS controller cable to HMS Controller.4Close HMS be careful not to pinch any of the wiring.5Close HMS and secure using the two draw latches. Fold draw latch handles down. Verify that HMS isfully closed and seated.6Close HMS draw latch door and lock using key.7Lock HMS with external lock.8Notify operator that replacement is complete and verify that no new alarms have been generated andthat old alarms are cleared.  9
Heat Management System  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-77DRAFTHeater Element ReplacementProcedureThis information is still under consideration at this time. Updatedinformation will be supplied at a later date.If desired, record the TME, HMS, and HMS Heater Elements serialnumber of the failed unit in Table 9-70 at the end of this chapter.Perform the procedure in Table 9-45 to remove the Heater Elements.Table 9-45: Procedure to Replace Heater ElementsStep Action1Perform the HMS removal procedure described in Table 9-43.! CAUTIONHeater Elements could still be hot, use caution when removing them. Recommend that thermalresistant gloves be worn to remove the heater elements.2345  Heater Element InstallationProcedureThis information is still under consideration at this time. Updatedinformation will be supplied at a later date.Perform the procedure in Table 9-46 toinstall the Heater Elements.Table 9-46: Procedure to Install Heater ElementsStep Action12345Perform the procedure in Table 9-44 to install the HMS.  9
Heat Management System  – continued 9-78 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFigure 9-29: HMS Heater ElementsNOTE:1. 8 point microdocument2. 8 point microdocument8 pt. Left Aligned text8 pt. Right Aligned Text8 pt. Centered TextHMS Controller ReplacementProcedureThis information is still under consideration at this time. Updatedinformation will be supplied at a later date.If desired, record the TME, HMS, and HMS Controller serial number ofthe failed unit in Table 9-71 at the end of this chapter.Perform the procedure in Table 9-47 to remove the HMS Controller.Table 9-47: Procedure to Replace HMS ControllerStep Action1Perform the HMS removal procedure described in Table 9-43.2345  HMS Controller InstallationProcedureThis information is still under consideration at this time. Updatedinformation will be supplied at a later date.9
Heat Management System  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-79DRAFTPerform the procedure in Table 9-48 to install the HMS Controller.Table 9-48: Procedure to Install HMS ControllerStep Action12345Perform the procedure in Table 9-44 to install the HMS.  Figure 9-30: HMS Controllerti–cdma–wp–00263–v01–ildoc–ahBlower Fan ReplacementProcedureThis information is still under consideration at this time. Updatedinformation will be supplied at a later date.If desired, record the TME, HMS, and Blower Fan serial number of thefailed unit in Table 9-72 at the end of this chapter.Perform the procedure in Table 9-47 to remove the Blower Fan.9
Heat Management System  – continued 9-80 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-49: Procedure to Replace Blower FanStep Action1Perform the procedure in Table 9-43 to remove the HMS.2345  Blower Fan InstallationProcedureThis information is still under consideration at this time. Updatedinformation will be supplied at a later date.Perform the procedure in Table 9-48 to install the Blower Fan.Table 9-50: Procedure to Install Blower FanStep Action12345Perform the procedure in Table 9-44 to install the HMS.  9
Heat Management System  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-81DRAFTFigure 9-31: Blower FanNOTE:1. 8 point microdocument2. 8 point microdocument8 pt. Left Aligned text8 pt. Right Aligned Text8 pt. Centered Text9
Thermal Management Enclosure 9-82 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe Thermal Management Enclosure (TME).System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the TME enclosure has been damaged it will no longer environmetallyprotect the BTS. Thus, an interruption in call processingwill occur whilethe TME is replaced.Required ItemsDocumentsNoneToolsSScrewdriver with T20 star bit or T30 star bitSTorque Driver Wrench or Torque Ratchet WrenchSSocket, 8 mm, 3/8–in or 1/4–inS10 mm socketReplacement ItemSTMEPrerequisiteCoordinate this repair task with the OMC–R operator.IMPORTANT*Contact the OMC–R operator before performing the replacementprocedure. Tell the operator that the Filter Tray will be replaced and thatalarms can be expected.Upon completion of the replacement procedure, have the OMC–Roperator verify that old alarms are cleared and that no new ones arereported.Replacement ProcedureRemove TMEFollow the procedure in Table 9-51 to remove the TME.Table 9-51: Procedure to Remove TMEStep Action1Notify operator that TME replacement procedure is starting and that alarms can be expected.2Perform Carrier Shutdown procedure as described in Table 10-4. table continued on next page9
Thermal Management Enclosure  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-83DRAFTTable 9-51: Procedure to Remove TMEStep Action3Disengage circuit breaker on the affected cCLPAs.4Use the key to unlock both doors of the TME.5Disengage TME PDA circuit breakers by pulling them out.6At the rear of the BTS disconnect antenna cables from BTS to TME.7If not already done, label individual cables as they are disconnected from the rear of the BTS.8Remove cover and disconnect DC power cables from BTS.9Use screwdriver to remove two screws securing ground lug to BTS.10 Use key to unlock the HMS draw latch door.11 Turn latches and open HMS.12 Disconnect ground lug by removing two nuts and washers with the driver wrench and socket.13 Disconnect DC power and HMS controller cable from HMS to TME.14 Lift HMS off hinge pins on TME and place on a flat surface. See Figure 4-21.! CAUTIONBe careful not to damage louvers protecting Blower Fan.15 Remove 5 M6 screws securing BTS to TME. See Figure 4-19.16 Slide BTS out of TME.17 Disconnect all conduit hubs and cabling from bottom of TME. Label conduit and cabling as necessary.18 Remove 6 M6 screws securing TME to Wall Mounting Bracket. See Figure 4-18.19 Lift  TME off of Wall Mounting Bracket.  Install TMEFollow the procedure in Table 9-52 to install the TME.Table 9-52: Procedure to Install TMEStep Action1Set the TME onto the Wall Mounting Bracket. Ensure that it rests in the slots of the Wall MountingBracket.  See Figure 4-17.2Secure the TME to the Wall Mounting Bracket using 6 M6 screws. Torque screws to 3.4 N–M (30in–lbs). See Figure 4-18.3Place BTS in TME opening and slide it in.4Secure BTS to TME using 5 M6 screws. Torque screws to 3.4 N–M (30 in–lbs). See Figure 4-19. table continued on next page9
Thermal Management Enclosure  – continued 9-84 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 9-52: Procedure to Install TMEStep Action5Insert cables from conduit up through their respective access holes and connect to the BTS.6Tighten conduit hubs.7Use a screw driver and two screws to secure the ground lug to the BTS.8Connect antenna cables from BTS to TME.9Connect all cabling to connectors on bottom of the TME.10 Install DC power wires to BTS, use a screwdriver to tighten screws holding wires.11 Install cover over BTS DC power connection.12 Set HMS on hinges on TME.13 Using the driver wrench and socket, attach ground lug to HMS using two nuts and washers.14 Connect DC power and HMS controller cable.15 Close HMS and secure using the two draw latches. Fold draw latch handles down. Verify that HMS isfully closed and seated.16 Close HMS draw latch door and lock using key.17 Turn on DC power to TME.18 Engage PDA circuit breakers (push in).19 Engage circuit breaker on affected cCLPAs.20 Notify operator that replacement is complete and verify that no new alarms have been generated andthat old alarms are cleared.21 Perform Carrier Startup Procedure as described in Table 10-7.  9
Power Distribution EnclosureJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-85DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this section cover only the removal and installation ofthe Powerl Distribution Enclosure (PDE).System Impact/ConsiderationsIf the PDE enclosure has been damaged it will no longer environmetallyprotect the AC–to–DC power converter circuitry. Thus, an interruptionin call processing will occur while the PDE is replaced.Replacement ProcedureConsult the manufacturer’s Field Replacement Unit (FRU) guide forremoval and replacement information.9
Master Item Number Failure List 9-86 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTIntroductionThe Master Item Number Failure List is provided as a means of keepinga written record of the units that failed for any particular BTS or BTSes.The list is for logistical purposes only.For the BTS Fan Module, use Table 9-53.Table 9-53: Fan Module Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberFan Module Number For the HSO/MSO Module, use Table 9-54.Table 9-54: HSO or MSO Module Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberHSO Module NumberMSO Module Number For the RGPS Head, use Table 9-55.Table 9-55: RGPS Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberRGPS Head Number For the RF GPS Module, use Table 9-56.Table 9-56: RF GPS Module Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberRF GPS Number 9
Master Item Number Failure List  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-87DRAFTFor the PSM, use Table 9-57.Table 9-57: PSM Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberPSM Number For the CSA Card, use Table 9-58.Table 9-58: CSA Card Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberCSA Card For the GLI3 Card, use Table 9-59.Table 9-59: GLI3 Card Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberGLI3 Card For the MCC–1X, use Table 9-60.Table 9-60: MCC–1X Card Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberMCC 1MCC 2MCC 3 9
Master Item Number Failure List  – continued 9-88 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFor the BBX–1X, use Table 9-61.Table 9-61: BBX–1X Card Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberBBX 1 (SGLG4044)BBX 4 (SGLG4044) For the cMPC, use Table 9-62.Table 9-62: Compact MPC Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberCompact MPC Number For the MCC–DO card, use Table 9-63.Table 9-63: MCC–DO Card Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberMCC–Data Only Card For the CBIO Board, use Table 9-64.Table 9-64: CBIO Board Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberCBIO Board For the SDCX Module, use Table 9-65.Table 9-65: SDCX Module Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberSDCX Number 9
Master Item Number Failure List  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  9-89DRAFTFor the Filter Tray, use Table 9-66.Table 9-66: Filter Tray Kit Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumberFilter Tray Kit (SGLN6221)Filter Tray Kit (SGLN6220)Filter Tray Kit (SGLN6219) For the cCLPA, use Table 9-67.Table 9-67: cCLPA Item Number ListItem NumberBTS NumbercCLPA #1 (If used)cCLPA #2 (If used) For the TME PDA, use Table 9-68.Table 9-68: TME PDA Item Number ListItem NumberTME NumberPDA For the TME HMS, use Table 9-69.Table 9-69: TME HMS Item Number ListItem NumberTME NumberHMS Number 9
Master Item Number Failure List  – continued 9-90 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTFor the TME HMS Heater Elements, use Table 9-70.Table 9-70: TME HMS Heater Element Item Number ListItem NumberTME NumberHMS NumberHeater Element For the TME HMS Controller, use Table 9-71.Table 9-71: TME HMS Controller Item Number ListItem NumberTME NumberHMS NumberHMS Controller Number For the TME HMS Blower Fan, use Table 9-72.Table 9-72: TME HMS Blower Fan Item Number ListItem NumberTME NumberHMS NumberHMS Blower Fan Number 9
Jun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRUDRAFTChapter 10: Reference Procedures Performed At OMC–RTable of ContentsReference Procedures Performed At OMC–R 10-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction 10-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing OMC–R CLI Window 10-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing OMC–R CLI Window 10-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures 10-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Site Signaling Functions for a Circuit BTS 10-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions for a Circuit BTS 10-9 . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions for a Circuit BTS 10-16 . . . . . . . . . . Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures 10-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Site Signaling Operations for a Circuit BTS 10-23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Sector Signaling Operations for a Circuit BTS 10-26 . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Carrier Signaling Operations for a Circuit BTS 10-29 . . . . . . . . . . . . Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures 10-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Site Signaling Functions for a Packet BTS 10-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions for a  Packet BTS 10-39 . . . . . . . . . . Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions for a Packet BTS 10-46 . . . . . . . . . . Packet BTS Start–Up Procedures 10-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Site Signaling Operations for a Packet BTS 10-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Sector Signaling Operations for a Packet BTS 10-56 . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Carrier Signaling Operations for a Packet BTS 10-59 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Table of Contents  – continued1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTNotes10
Reference Procedures Performed At OMC–RJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-1DRAFTIntroductionThe procedures in this chapter are referenced during various FRUreplacement procedures and are performed by the OMC–R operator.These reference procedure covers the following:SAccessing OMCR CLI windowSCircuit BTS shut down and restore procedures for:– BTS– Sector– CarrierSPacket BTS shut down and restore procedures for:– BTS– Sector– Carrier10
Accessing OMC–R CLI Window 10-2 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTAccessing OMC–R CLI WindowMany of the FRU procedures require the OMC–R operator to manipulateBTS logical devices. This is achieved via UNO or the OMC–R(Operations and Maintenance Center – Radio) Command Line Interface(CLI).The operator enters commands via UNO or OMC–R CLI.Should there be any issues which affect UNO or theOMC–R CLI operations, command dependent replacementprocedures cannot be performed.IMPORTANT*OMC–R CLI access procedureThe following procedure is performed by the OMC–R operator at theOMC–R terminal.Table 10-1: Login and Access Alarm Window ProcedurenStep Action1Login by entering the user name.2Enter the password at the system prompt.3Open an UNO Alarm Manager window and an OMC–R CLI window from the pull down menuusing the mouse button.4Verify that the filter display is set to the BTS–# where the work is being performed. This ensuresthat any BTS–# alarms, encountered while installing the hardware, can be observed and rectified.10
Circuit BTS Shut Down ProceduresJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-3DRAFTShut Down Site Signaling Functions fora Circuit BTSIf a complete site shutdown is required for the FRU replacement, followthe procedure in Table 10-2 to disable the circuit BTS site.This site shut down procedure takes a BTS out–of–service(OOS), but does not affect other BTSs. To minimizesystem impact, it may be advisable (but not necessary) toperform this procedure during a maintenance window.CAUTIONThe EDIT REDIRECT or REDIRECT2 command doesNOT affect calls in progress and does NOT move thesecalls to another BTS. The command only prevents futurecalls from being originated on the targeted BTS. If activecall processing is still taking place in the target BTS, waitfor any active calls to terminate before disabling the BTS.IMPORTANT*Refer to the System Commands Reference manual(68P09256A58) part/of Cellular System AdministrationCDMA2000 1X – 99R09255A10 CD–ROM for a completeexplanation of OMCR commands.NOTETable 10-2: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnStep Action1Open a CLI window. Refer to the Accessing OMC–R CLI Window section on page 10-2.* IMPORTANTIt is recommended that you redirect subscribers to another site/carrier and then wait for any activecalls to terminate before disabling the BTS.2If you want to redirect subscribers and then wait for any active calls to terminate before disablingthe BTS, go to step 3.If you are not concerned about redirecting subscribers and waiting for any active calls to terminateand you just want to disable the BTS, perform step 13 and step 15 only.. . . continued on next page 10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-4 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-2: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEThe REDIRECT command is used to redirect subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site or to invoke theREDIRECT2 command which is then used to redirect subscribers to a different CDMA carrierfrequency. REDIRECT2 is the preferred command if an alternate CDMA carrier is available.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT REDIRECT command when restoring signaling operations at theend of the replacement procedure.3View the status of the BTS signaling redirect parameters for all carriers equipped for the BTS byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECTObserve the following typical system display response for a BTS (this example shows initialstandard values):                             Access Overload Class Redirect Flags                      RETURN                                       ROTATE  RECORD   EXP   IGNORE    SYS     CARRIER ID       IF FAIL  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1     TIMER    TYPE    SID    CDMA   ORDERING(bts–sector–carrier)           0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5     (sec)––––––––––––––––––––  –––––––  – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –     ––––––  ––––––  –––––  ––––––  ––––––––  CARRIER–1–1–1        N     N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N       4       1       0      N       CUSTOM . . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-5DRAFTTable 10-2: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the REDIRECT parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to bebroadcast on the paging channel redirects all subscribers away from the BTS and onto a differentBTS or system.4Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT!The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:<accolc0>enter Y, <accolc1>enter Y, ... <accolc15> enter Y (All Access Overload Classes must be set to yes to ensure that all subscribers are redirected.)<returniffail> , enter N(Must be set to no to ensure that subscribers do not return if redirect is unsuccessful.)<recordtype> , enter 1 or 2 (A value of 2 will invoke REDIRECT2 which is used to redirect subscribers to a CDMA channelat a neighbor site. A value of 1 redirects subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site. This example uses 2.)<expectedsid> , enter 13 (Use the Area ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system where they are beingredirected. This example uses 13. The valid range is 0 – 32767; the default is 0.)<ignorecdma> , enter Y<sysordering> , enter CUSTOM (The system acquisition ordering value tells the mobiles the order to use when attempting toobtain service on the different analog systems. Valid values are: CUSTOM – use custom systemselection; AONLY – try the A system only; BONLY – use the B system only; AFIRST – try the Asystem first. If unsuccessful, try the B system; BFIRST – try the B system first. If unsuccessful,try the A system; AORB – try A or B. If unsuccessful try the alternative system; CUSTOM is thedefault.)<rotatetimer> , enter 4 (Call processing continuously rotates, circular right–shifts, the Y/N values of Access OverloadClass Redirect Flags 0 to 9. Values are shifted one flag at the end of the timer period; then timerre–starts. Valid values are 0–255; 4 is the default.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-6 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-2: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep5View the status of the signaling REDIRECT parameters to verify that the applicable BTS is readyfor global redirect.omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECTEnsure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 4 (seeexample below).Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– –––– ––– ––––––––  CARRIER–1–1–1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 2 13 Y CUSTOM6If 2 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 7.If 1 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 10.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT REDIRECT2 command when restoring signaling operations atthe end of the replacement procedure.7View the status of the BTS signaling redirect parameters for all carriers equipped for the BTS byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT2Observe the following typical system display response for a BTS (this example shows initialstandard values):                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID     CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9    10    11    12    13    14   15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  –––––––––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––   CARRIER–1–1–1      65535   CDMA800   –   –    –   –    –    –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     . . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-7DRAFTTable 10-2: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the REDIRECT2 parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to bebroadcast on the paging channel redirects all subscribers away from the BTS with the failedequipment and onto a CDMA channel at a neighbor site.8Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT2!The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:expecting an integer number (from 0 to 65535)<EXPNID= ? >(Use the Network ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system they are beingredirected to. This example uses 555.)expecting an integer number (from 0 to 2047)<CHAN1= ? >, <CHAN2= ? > ... <CHAN15= ?>(A list of CDMA channels for neighbor sites that the subscriber units can use for redirection. Thisexample uses 200, 350, 400, 725, 75, 175, 100, 575, and 775.)expecting an enumerated value:    CDMA1900    CDMA800     CDMA900     JAPANCDMA     CDMA2100<BANDCLASS= ? >(Use CDMA1900  for 1.9 GHz systems, and CDMA800 for 1.9 GHz systems. This example usesCDMA800.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).9View the status of the BTS signaling REDIRECT2 parameters to verify that the BTS is ready formaintenance.omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT2Ensure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 8 (seeexample below).                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID     CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9    10    11    12    13    14   15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  –––––––––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––    CARRIER–1–1–1      555    CDMA800  200  350  400  725  75   175  100   575   775   –     –     –     –     –     –    . . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-8 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-2: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep10 View the existing congestion control parameters for all carriers equipped for the BTS by enteringthe following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for a BTS:        CARRIER                NEWCALL      REG        AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#)  SET  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ANALOGREDIRECT  GLOBALREDIRECT–––––––––––––––––––––––  –––  –––––––––  –––––––––  –––––––––  ––––––––––––––  ––––––––––––––        1–1–1             1    ENABLE     ENABLE     ENABLE        DISABLE         DISABLE      NOTEIn this step, you will change the value of the Global Service Redirection Flag(GLOBALREDIRECT) in the congestion control parameters so that the Global Service RedirectMessage is broadcast on all of the sector paging channels at the BTS.11 Enter the following command at the prompt using the applicable BTS number:omc–000000>EDIT BTS –<bts#> CONGESTCONF !The system prompts you to enter each control parameter value one at a time. Skip through theprompts until you get to the following:<globalredirect> , enter ENABLE (This will force the Global Service Redirect Message to be broadcast on all of the sector pagingchannels at the BTS.)The system displays the values of the control parameters. Verify that only theGLOBALREDIRECT value changed.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the change.Now the Global Service Redirection Message is sent over the sector paging channels. Allsubscribers are redirected away from the BTS and onto a different system or CDMA carrierchannel. This effectively shuts down the BTS.12 Verify that the CONGESTCONF globalredirect is enabled for each carrier at the BTS byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for a BTS:        CARRIER                NEWCALL      REG        AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#)  SET  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ANALOGREDIRECT  GLOBALREDIRECT–––––––––––––––––––––––  –––  –––––––––  –––––––––  –––––––––  ––––––––––––––  ––––––––––––––          1–1–1           1    ENABLE     ENABLE     ENABLE        DISABLE         ENABLE      13 Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSRecord the system response for all devices that are OOS_AUTOMATIC. This information will beused for later reference when restoring site signaling operations.. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-9DRAFTTable 10-2: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep14 Wait three minutes to allow any active calls to terminate.15 Disable the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISABLE BTS–<bts#> UNC Shut Down Sector Signaling Functionsfor a Circuit BTSIf a sector shutdown is required for the FRU replacement and the site iscurrently under CBSC control, follow the procedure in Table 10-3 todisable the sector.This sector shut down procedure takes a sectorout–of–service (OOS) but does not affect the other sectors.To minimize system impact, it may be advisable (but notnecessary) to perform this procedure during a maintenancewindow.CAUTIONThe EDIT SECTOR REDIRECT or REDIRECT2command does NOT affect calls in progress and does NOTmove these calls to another sector/carrier. The commandonly prevents future calls from being originated on thetargeted sector/carrier. If active call processing is stilltaking place in the target sector/carrier, wait for any activecalls to terminate before disabling the sector/carrier.IMPORTANT*Refer to the System Commands Reference manual(68P09256A58) part/of Cellular System AdministrationCDMA2000 1X – 99R09255A10 CD–ROM for a completeexplanation of OMC–R commands.NOTETable 10-3: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnStep ActionAT THE OMCR1Open a CLI window. Refer to the Accessing OMC–R CLI Window section on page 10-2.. . . continued on next page 10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-10 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-3: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep* IMPORTANTIt is recommended that you redirect subscribers to another sector/carrier and then wait for anyactive calls to terminate before disabling the sector/carrier.2If you want to redirect subscribers and then wait for any active calls to terminate before disablingthe sector/carrier, go to step 3.If you are not concerned about redirecting subscribers and waiting for any active calls to terminateand you just want to disable the sector/carrier, perform steps 13 through 16.NOTEThe REDIRECT command is used to redirect subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site or to invoke theREDIRECT2 command which is then used to redirect subscribers to a different CDMA carrierfrequency. REDIRECT2 is the preferred command if an alternate CDMA carrier is available.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT SECTOR REDIRECT command when restoring signalingoperations at the end of the replacement procedure.3View the status of the sector signaling redirect parameters for all carriers equipped for the sectorby entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECTObserve the following typical system display response for sector 2 (this example shows initialstandard values):Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– ––– –––– –––––––CARRIER–1–1–1 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 4 1 0 N CUSTOM. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-11DRAFTTable 10-3: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the REDIRECT parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to bebroadcast on the paging channel redirects all subscribers away from the sector with the failedequipment and onto a different sector, BTS, or system.4Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECT !The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:<accolc0>enter Y, <accolc1>enter Y,... <accolc15>enter Y(All Access Overload Classes must be set to yes to ensure that all subscribers are redirected.)<returniffail> , enter N(Must be set to no to ensure that subscribers do not return if redirect is unsuccessful.)<recordtype> , enter 1 or 2 (A value of 2 will invoke REDIRECT2 which is used to redirect subscribers to a CDMA channelat a neighbor sector/site. A value of 1 redirects subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site. This example uses2.)<expectedsid> , enter 13 (Use the Area ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system where they are beingredirected. This example uses 13. The valid range is 0 – 32767; the default is 0.)<ignorecdma> , enter Y<sysordering> , enter CUSTOM (The system acquisition ordering value tells the mobiles the order to use when attempting toobtain service on the different analog systems. Valid values are: CUSTOM – use custom systemselection; AONLY – try the A system only; BONLY – use the B system only; AFIRST – try the Asystem first. If unsuccessful, try the B system; BFIRST – try the B system first. If unsuccessful,try the A system; AORB – try A or B. If unsuccessful try the alternative system; CUSTOM is thedefault.)<rotatetimer> , enter 4 (Call processing continuously rotates, circular right–shifts, the Y/N values of Access OverloadClass Redirect Flags 0 to 9. Values are shifted one flag at the end of the timer period; then timerre–starts. Valid values are 0–255; 4 is the default.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-12 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-3: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep5View the status of the sector signaling REDIRECT parameters to verify that the applicable sectoris ready for global redirect.omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECTEnsure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 4 (seeexample below).Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– –––– ––– ––––––––CARRIER–1–1–1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 2 13 Y CUSTOM6If 2 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 7.If 1 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 10.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT SECTOR REDIRECT2 command when restoring signalingoperations at the end of the replacement procedure.7View the status of the sector signaling REDIRECT2 parameters for all carriers equipped for thesector by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECT2Observe the following typical system display response for sector 2 (this example shows initialstandard values):                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID     CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9    10    11    12    13    14   15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  –––––––––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––    CARRIER–1–1–1     65535   CDMA800   –   –    –   –    –    –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     . . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-13DRAFTTable 10-3: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the REDIRECT2 parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to bebroadcast on the paging channel redirects all subscribers away from the sector with the failedequipment and onto a CDMA channel at a neighbor sector/site.8Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECT2 !The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:expecting an integer number (from 0 to 65535)<EXPNID= ? >(Use the Network ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system they are beingredirected to. This example uses 555.)expecting an integer number (from 0 to 2047)<CHAN1= ? >, <CHAN2= ? > ... <CHAN15= ?>(A list of CDMA channels for neighbor sites that the subscriber units can use for redirection. Thisexample uses 200, 350, 400, 725, 75, 175,  100, 575, and 775.)expecting an enumerated value:    CDMA1900    CDMA800     CDMA900     JAPANCDMA     CDMA2100<BANDCLASS= ? >(Use CDMA1900  for 1.9 GHz systems, and CDMA800 for 800 MHz systems. This example usesCDMA1900.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).9View the status of the sector signaling REDIRECT2 parameters to verify that the sector is readyfor maintenance.omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECT2Ensure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 8 (seeexample below).                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID    CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9     10    11    12    13    14    15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  –––––––––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––    CARRIER–1–1–1      555    CDMA800  200  350  400  725  75   175  100   575   775   –     –     –     –     –     –    . . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-14 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-3: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep10 View the existing congestion control parameters for all carriers equipped for the applicable sectorby entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for sector 2:CARRIER NEWCALL REG AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#) SET ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ANALOGREDIRECT GLOBALREDIRECT––––––––––––––––––––––– ––– ––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––1–1–1 1 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLENOTEIn this step, you will change the value of the Global Service Redirection Flag(GLOBALREDIRECT) in the congestion control parameters so that the Global Service RedirectMessage is broadcast on the sector paging channel.11 Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> CONGESTCONF !The system prompts you to enter each control parameter value one at a time. Skip through theprompts until you get to the following:<globalredirect> , enter ENABLE (This forces the Global Service Redirect Message to be broadcast on the sector paging channel.)The system displays the values of the control parameters. Verify that only theGLOBALREDIRECT value changed.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the change.Now the Global Service Redirection Message is sent over the sector paging channels. Allsubscribers are redirected away from the sector and onto a different system. This effectively shutsdown the sector.12 Verify that the CONGESTCONF globalredirect is enabled for each carrier on the sector byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for sector 2:CARRIER NEWCALL REG AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#) SET ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ANALOGREDIRECT GLOBALREDIRECT––––––––––––––––––––––– ––– ––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––1–1–1 1 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-15DRAFTTable 10-3: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep13 Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSObserve the following typical system response:DEVSYNCConfig Calibration CalibrationDEVICE CBSC STATUS Data Data Sync–––––––––––––––––– –––– –––––– –––– –––– –––––––BTS–1 1 INS n/a n/a n/aBTSSPAN–1–1 1 INS n/a n/a n/aBTSLINK–1–1 1 INS n/a n/a n/aGLI–1–1 1 INS–ACTIVE GOOD n/a n/aCSA–1–1 1 INS_ACTIVE GOOD n/a n/aBBX–1–1 1 INS–ACTIVE GOOD GOOD n/aBBX–1–2 1 INS–STANDBY GOOD GOOD n/aMCC–1–1 1 INS GOOD n/a n/aRecord the system response for all devices that are OOS_AUTOMATIC.14 Wait three minutes to allow any active calls to terminate.15 Disable all BBX cards by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISABLE BBX–bts#–bbx# UNC16 Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSObserve the system response.Verify that the BBX cards have been disabled and are OOS_MANUAL. 10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-16 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTShut Down Carrier Signaling Functionsfor a Circuit BTSIf a carrier shutdown is required for the FRU replacement and the site iscurrently under CBSC control, follow the procedure in Table 10-4 todisable the carrier at a circuit BTS.This carrier shut down procedure takes a carrierout–of–service (OOS) but does not affect the other carriers.To minimize system impact, it may be advisable (but notnecessary) to perform this procedure during a maintenancewindow.CAUTIONThe EDIT CARRIER REDIRECT or REDIRECT2command does NOT affect calls in progress and does NOTmove these calls to another sector/carrier. The commandonly prevents future calls from being originated on thetargeted sector/carrier. If active call processing is stilltaking place in the target sector/carrier, wait for any activecalls to terminate before disabling the sector/carrier.IMPORTANT*Refer to the System Commands Reference manual(68P09256A58) part/of Cellular System AdministrationCDMA2000 1X – 99R09255A10 CD–ROM for a completeexplanation of OMCR commands.NOTETable 10-4: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnStep ActionAT THE OMC–R1Open a CLI window. Refer to the Accessing OMC–R CLI Window section on page 10-2.* IMPORTANTIt is recommended that you redirect subscribers to another sector/carrier and then wait for anyactive calls to terminate before disabling the sector/carrier.2If you want to redirect subscribers and then wait for any active calls to terminate before disablingthe sector/carrier, go to step 3.If you are not concerned about redirecting subscribers and waiting for any active calls to terminateand you just want to disable the sector/carrier, perform steps 15 through 18.. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-17DRAFTTable 10-4: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEThe REDIRECT command is used to redirect subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site or to invoke theREDIRECT2 command which is then used to redirect subscribers to a different CDMA carrierfrequency. REDIRECT2 is the preferred command if an alternate CDMA carrier is available.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT CARRIER REDIRECT command when restoring signalingoperations at the end of the replacement procedure.3View the status of the carrier signaling REDIRECT parameters for an applicable carrier equippedfor a specific sector by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> REDIRECTObserve the following typical system display response for carrier 1, sector 2 (this example showsinitial standard values):Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– ––– –––– –––––––CARRIER–1–1–1 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 4 1 0 N CUSTOM. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-18 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-4: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the REDIRECT parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to bebroadcast on the paging channel redirects subscribers assigned to the sector carrier away from thecarrier/sector with the failed equipment and onto a different carrier, sector, BTS, or system.4Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> REDIRECT !The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:<accolc0>enter Y, <accolc1>enter Y,... <accolc15>enter Y(All Access Overload Classes must be set to yes to ensure that all subscribers are redirected.)<returniffail> , enter N(Must be set to no to ensure that subscribers do not return if redirect is unsuccessful.)<recordtype> , enter 1 or 2 (A value of 2 will invoke REDIRECT2 which is used to redirect subscribers to a CDMA channelat a neighbor sector/site. A value of 1 redirects subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site. This example uses2.)<expectedsid> , enter 13 (Use the Area ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system where they are beingredirected. This example uses 13. The valid range is 0 – 32767; the default is 0.)<ignorecdma> , enter Y<sysordering> , enter CUSTOM (The system acquisition ordering value tells the mobiles the order to use when attempting toobtain service on the different analog systems. Valid values are: CUSTOM – use custom systemselection; AONLY – try the A system only; BONLY – use the B system only; AFIRST – try the Asystem first. If unsuccessful, try the B system; BFIRST – try the B system first. If unsuccessful,try the A system; AORB – try A or B. If unsuccessful try the alternative system; CUSTOM is thedefault.)<rotatetimer> , enter 4 (Call processing continuously rotates, circular right–shifts, the Y/N values of Access OverloadClass Redirect Flags 0 to 9. Values are shifted one flag at the end of the timer period; then timerre–starts. Valid values are 0–255; 4 is the default.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-19DRAFTTable 10-4: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep5View the status of the carrier signaling redirect parameters to verify that the carrier is ready formaintenance.omc–000000>DISPLAY CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> REDIRECTEnsure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 4 (seeexample below).Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– –––– ––– ––––––––CARRIER–1–1–1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 2 13 Y CUSTOM6Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as required for other sectors with this carrier.7If 2 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 8.If 1 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 12.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT CARRIER REDIRECT2 command when restoring signalingoperations at the end of the replacement procedure.8View the status of the carrier signaling redirect parameters for the carrier and sector by enteringthe following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> REDIRECT2Observe the following typical system display response for carrier 1, sector 2 (this example showsinitial standard values):                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID    CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9     10    11    12    13    14   15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  –––––––––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––  CARRIER–1–1–1      65535    CDMA800   –   –    –    –    –    –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-20 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-4: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the redirect parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to be broadcaston the paging channel redirects all subscribers away from the carrier with the failed equipment andonto a different CDMA carrier frequency.9Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> REDIRECT2 !The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:expecting an integer number (from 0 to 65535)<EXPNID= ? >(Use the Network ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system they are beingredirected to. This example uses 555.)expecting an integer number (from 0 to 2047)<CHAN1= ? >, <CHAN2= ? > ... <CHAN15= ?>(A list of CDMA channels for neighbor sites that the subscriber units can use for redirection. Thisexample uses 200, 350, 400, 725, 75, 175, 100, 575, and 775.)expecting an enumerated value:    CDMA1900    CDMA800     CDMA900     JAPANCDMA     CDMA2100<BANDCLASS= ? >(Use CDMA1900 for 1.9 GHz systems, and CDMA800 for 800 MHz systems. This example usesCDMA1900.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).10 View the status of the carrier signaling redirect parameters to verify that the sector is ready formaintenance.omc–000000>DISPLAY CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> REDIRECT2Ensure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 9 (seeexample below).                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID     CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9    10    11    12    13    14   15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  ––––––––– –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––  CARRIER–1–1–1        555    CDMA800  200  350  400  725  75   175  100   575   775   –     –     –     –     –     –   11 Repeat Steps 8 through 10 as required for other sectors with this carrier.. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-21DRAFTTable 10-4: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep12 View the existing congestion control parameters for the applicable carrier equipped for a specificsector by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for carrier 1, sector 2:CARRIER NEWCALL REG AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#) SET ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ANALOGREDIRECT GLOBALREDIRECT––––––––––––––––––––––– ––– ––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––146–2–1 1 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLENOTEIn this step, you will change the value of the Global Service Redirection Flag(GLOBALREDIRECT) in the congestion control parameters so that the Global Service RedirectMessage is broadcast on the sector paging channel of a specific carrier.13 Enter the following command at the prompt using the carrier number and the applicable sectornumber:omc–000000>EDIT CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> CONGESTCONF !The system prompts you to enter each control parameter value one at a time. Skip through theprompts until you get to the following:<globalredirect> , enter ENABLE (This will force the Global Service Redirect Message to be broadcast on the sector pagingchannel.)The system displays the values of the control parameters. Verify that only theGLOBALREDIRECT value changed.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the change.Now the Global Service Redirection Message is sent over the sector paging channel. Allsubscribers are redirected away from the carrier/sector and onto a different system. This effectivelyshuts down the carrier/sector.14 Repeat Steps 12 and 13 as required for other sectors, selecting the proper sector number for thesector# parameter.. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-22 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-4: Shut Down Carrier Signaling Functions Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep15 Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSObserve the following typical system response:DEVSYNCConfig Calibration CalibrationDEVICE CBSC STATUS Data Data Sync–––––––––––––––––– –––– –––––– –––– –––– –––––––BTS–1 1 INS n/a n/a n/aBTSSPAN–1–1 1 INS n/a n/a n/aBTSLINK–1–1 1 INS n/a n/a n/aMGLI–1–1 1 INS–ACTIVE GOOD n/a n/aCSA–1–1 1 INS_ACTIVE GOOD n/a n/aBBX–1–1 1 INS–ACTIVE GOOD GOOD n/aBBX–1–2 1 INS–STANDBY GOOD GOOD n/aMCC–1–1 1 INS GOOD n/a n/aMCC–1–2 1 INS GOOD n/a n/aMCC–1–3 1 INS GOOD n/a n/aRecord the system response for all devices that are OOS_AUTOMATIC.16 Wait three minutes to allow any active calls to terminate.17 Disable all BBX cards by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISABLE BBX–bts#–bbx# UNC18 Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSObserve the system response.Verify that the BBX cards on the have been disabled and are OOS_MANUAL. 10
Circuit BTS Start–Up ProceduresJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-23DRAFTRestore Site SignalingOperations for a Circuit BTSRestore site signaling operations according to the procedure inTable 10-5.Table 10-5: Restore Site Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnStep ActionAT THE OMCR1Open a CLI window. Refer to the Accessing OMC–R CLI Window section on page 10-2.2Enable the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>ENABLE BTS–<bts#> UNC3Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSObserve the system response.Make sure that there are not more OOS_AUTOMATIC devices than what was observed in step 13of the shut down site signaling functions procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2. Devices thatwere previously OOS_AUTOMATIC may now be INS.4If you did not redirect subscribers according to the steps in the shut down site signaling functionsprocedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2, STOP here.If you did redirect subscribers according to the steps in the shut down site signaling functionsprocedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2, perform the remaining steps of this table.5View the existing congestion control parameters for all carriers equipped for the BTS by enteringthe following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for a BTS:        CARRIER                NEWCALL      REG        AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#)  SET  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ANALOGREDIRECT  GLOBALREDIRECT–––––––––––––––––––––––  –––  –––––––––  –––––––––  –––––––––  ––––––––––––––  ––––––––––––––        1–1–1             1    ENABLE     ENABLE     ENABLE        DISABLE         ENABLE     . . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures  – continued 10-24 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-5: Restore Site Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEIn this step, you will change the value of the Global Service Redirection Flag(GLOBALREDIRECT) in the congestion control parameters so that the Global Service RedirectMessage is only broadcast on the sector paging channel when there is traffic congestion in thesector.6Enter the following command at the prompt using the applicable BTS number:omc–000000>EDIT BTS –<bts#> CONGESTCONF !The system prompts you to enter each control parameter value one at a time. Skip through theprompts until you get to the following:<globalredirect> , enter DISABLE (This will revert the Global Service Redirect Message to congestion control.)The system displays the values of the control parameters. Verify that only theGLOBALREDIRECT value changed.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the change.Now the Global Service Redirection Message will only be sent over the sector paging channelswhen there is traffic congestion in the sector.7Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> CONGESTCONFObserve the system display response.Verify that the CONGESTCONF globalredirect is disabled for each carrier at the BTS.8View the status of the signaling REDIRECT parameters for all carriers equipped for the applicableBTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECTObserve that the values in the system display response should match the values input in step 4 ofthe shut down site signaling functions procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2 (see examplebelow).Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– –––– ––– ––––––––  CARRIER–1–1–1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 2 13 Y CUSTOM . . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-25DRAFTTable 10-5: Restore Site Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep* IMPORTANTIn this step, use the values recorded in step 3 of the shut down site signaling functions procedurefor a circuit BTS Table 10-2 to answer the prompts for the EDIT BTS REDIRECT command;except for record type enter 2.NOTEThis step shows the entry of initial standard values which is consistent with the original example;except record type must be 2. Your entries may be different.9Restore the values of all REDIRECT parameters by entering the following command at theprompt:omc–000000>EDIT BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT !The system will prompt you to enter each command parameter one at a time. Answer the promptsin the following order (Note that the following specified values are consistent with the originalexample. Yours may be different):<accolc0> enter N, <accolc1>enter N, ... <accolc15>enter N<returniffail> , enter N<recordtype> , enter 2<expectedsid> , enter 0<ignorecdma> , enter N<sysordering> , enter CUSTOM<rotatetimer> , enter 4The system will display the command that will be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).10 View the status of the signaling REDIRECT parameters by entering the following command at theprompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECTEnsure that the values in the system display response match the values input by the operator instep 9 (see example below).                             Access Overload Class Redirect Flags                      RETURN                                       ROTATE  RECORD   EXP   IGNORE    SYS     CARRIER ID       IF FAIL  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1     TIMER    TYPE    SID    CDMA   ORDERING(bts–sector–carrier)           0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5     (sec)––––––––––––––––––––  –––––––  – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –     ––––––  ––––––  –––––  ––––––  ––––––––  CARRIER–1 –1–1        N     N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N       4       2       0      N       CUSTOM  10
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures  – continued 10-26 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTRestore Sector Signaling Operations for aCircuit BTSRestore sector signaling operations according to the procedure inTable 10-6.Table 10-6: Restore Sector Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnStep ActionAT THE OMCR1Open a CLI window. Refer to the Accessing OMCR CLI Window section on page 10-2.2Enable all BBX cards that were disabled in step 15 of the shut  down  sector  signaling  functionsprocedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2 by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>ENABLE BBX–bts#–bbx# UNC3Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSObserve the system response.Make sure that there are not more OOS_AUTOMATIC devices than what was observed in step 13of the shut  down  sector  signaling  functions  procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2. Verify thatthe BBX cards have been enabled and are INS_ACTIVE and INS_STANDBY respectively.4If you did not redirect subscribers according to the steps in the shut  down  sector  signalingfunctions  procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2, stop here.If you did redirect subscribers according to the steps in the shut  down  sector  signaling  functionsprocedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2, perform the remaining steps of this table.5View the congestion control parameters for all carriers equipped for the applicable sector byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for sector 2:CARRIER NEWCALL REG AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#) SET ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ANALOGREDIRECT GLOBALREDIRECT––––––––––––––––––––––– ––– ––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––1–1–1 1 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-27DRAFTTable 10-6: Restore Sector Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEIn this step, you will change the value of the Global Service Redirection Flag(GLOBALREDIRECT) in the congestion control parameters so that the Global Service RedirectMessage is only broadcast on the sector paging channel when there is traffic congestion in thesector.6Enter the following command at the prompt using the applicable sector number:omc–000000>EDIT SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> CONGESTCONF !The system will prompt you to enter each control parameter value one at a time. Skip through theprompts until you get to the following:<globalredirect> , enter DISABLE (This will revert the Global Service Redirect Message to congestion control.)The system will display the values of the control parameters. Verify that only theGLOBALREDIRECT value changed.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the change.Now the Global Service Redirection Message will only be sent over the sector paging channelswhen there is traffic congestion in the sector.7Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> CONGESTCONFObserve the system display response.Verify that the CONGESTCONF globalredirect is disabled for each carrier on the sector.8View the status of the sector signaling REDIRECT parameters for all carriers equipped for theapplicable sector by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECTObserve that the values in the system display response should match the values input in step 4 ofthe shut  down  sector  signaling  functions  procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2 (see examplebelow).Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– –––– ––– ––––––––CARRIER–1–1–1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 2 13 Y CUSTOM. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures  – continued 10-28 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-6: Restore Sector Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep* IMPORTANTIn this step, use the values recorded in step 3 of the shut  down  sector  signaling  functionsprocedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-2 to answer the prompts for the EDIT SECTORREDIRECT command; except for record type enter 2.NOTEThis step shows the entry of initial standard values which is consistent with the original example;except record type must be 2. Your entries may be different.9Restore the values of all REDIRECT parameters by entering the following command at theprompt:omc–000000>EDIT SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECT !The system will prompt you to enter each command parameter one at a time. Answer the promptsin the following order (Note that the following specified values are consistent with the originalexample. Yours may be different):<accolc0> enter N, <accolc1>enter N, ... <accolc15>enter N<returniffail> , enter N<recordtype> , enter 2<expectedsid> , enter 0<ignorecdma> , enter N<sysordering> , enter CUSTOM<rotatetimer> , enter 4The system will display the command that will be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).10 View the status of the sector signaling REDIRECT parameters by entering the following commandat the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECTEnsure that the values in the system display response match the values input by the operator instep 9 (see example below).Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– ––– –––– –––––––CARRIER–1–1–1 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 4 2 0 N CUSTOM 10
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-29DRAFTRestore Carrier Signaling Operations fora Circuit BTSRestore carrier signaling operations according to the procedure inTable 10-7.Table 10-7: Restore Carrier Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnStep Action1Open a CLI window. Refer to the Accessing OMCR CLI Window section on page 10-2.2Enable all BBX cards that were disabled in step 17 of the shut  down  carrier  signaling  functionsprocedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-4 by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>ENABLE BBX–bts#–bbx# UNC3Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSObserve the system response.Make sure that there are not more OOS_AUTOMATIC devices than what was observed in step 15of the shut  down  carrier  signaling  functions  procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-4. Verify thatthe BBX cards have been enabled and are INS_ACTIVE and INS_STANDBY respectively.4If you did not redirect subscribers according to the steps in the shut  down  carrier  signalingfunctions  procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-4, stop here.If you did redirect subscribers according to the steps in the shut  down  carrier  signaling  functionsprocedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-4, perform the remaining steps of this table.5View the congestion control parameters for all carriers equipped for the applicable sector byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for sector 2:CARRIER NEWCALL REG AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#) SET ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ALARMFLAG ANALOGREDIRECT GLOBALREDIRECT––––––––––––––––––––––– ––– ––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––– –––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––1–1–1 1 ENABLE ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE ENABLE. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures  – continued 10-30 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-7: Restore Carrier Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStepNOTEIn this step, you will change the value of the Global Service Redirection Flag(GLOBALREDIRECT) in the congestion control parameters so that the Global Service RedirectMessage is only broadcast on the sector paging channel of a specific carrier when there is trafficcongestion in the carrier/sector.6Enter the following command at the prompt using one of the applicable carrier number and theapplicable sector number:omc–000000>EDIT CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> CONGESTCONF !The system will prompt you to enter each control parameter value one at a time. Skip through theprompts until you get to the following:<globalredirect> , enter DISABLE (This will revert the Global Service Redirect Message to congestion control.)The system will display the values of the control parameters. Verify that only theGLOBALREDIRECT value changed.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the change.Now the Global Service Redirection Message will only be sent over the sector paging channelwhen there is traffic congestion in the carrier/sector.7Repeat step 6 for each remaining sector number disabled in step 14 of the shut  down  carriersignaling  functions  procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-4.8View the status of the carrier signaling redirect parameters to verify the applicable carrier equippedfor the specific sector.omc–000000>DISPLAY CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> REDIRECTObserve that the values in the system display response should match the values input in step 4 ofthe shut  down  carrier  signaling  functions  procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-4.Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– –––– ––– ––––––––CARRIER–146–2–1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 2 13 Y CUSTOM9Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> CONGESTCONFObserve the system display response.Verify that the CONGESTCONF globalredirect is disabled for the specific carrier on each theapplicable sectors.. . . continued on next page10
Circuit BTS Start–Up Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-31DRAFTTable 10-7: Restore Carrier Signaling Operations Procedure For a Circuit BTSnActionStep* IMPORTANTIn this step, use the values recorded in step 3 of the shut  down  carrier  signaling  functionsprocedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-4 to answer the prompts for the EDIT CARRIERREDIRECT command; except for record type enter 2.NOTEThis step shows the entry of initial standard values which is consistent with the original example;except record type must be 2. Your entries may be different.10 Restore the values of all REDIRECT parameters by entering the following command at theprompt:omc–000000>EDIT CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#> REDIRECT !The system will prompt you to enter each command parameter one at a time. Answer the promptsin the following order (Note that the following specified values are consistent with the originalexample. Yours may be different):<accolc0> enter N, <accolc1>enter N, ... <accolc15>enter N<returniffail> , enter N<recordtype> , enter 2<expectedsid> , enter 0<ignorecdma> , enter N<sysordering> , enter CUSTOM<rotatetimer> , enter 4The system will display the command that will be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).11 Repeat steps 5 and 10, as required, for each remaining sector number disabled in step 14 of theshut  down  carrier  signaling  functions  procedure for a circuit BTS Table 10-4.12 View the status of the signaling REDIRECT parameters by entering the following command at theprompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECTEnsure that the values in the system display response match the values for the specific carrier oneach the applicable sector(s) input by the operator in step 10 (see example below).                             Access Overload Class Redirect Flags                      RETURN                                       ROTATE  RECORD   EXP   IGNORE    SYS     CARRIER ID       IF FAIL  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1     TIMER    TYPE    SID    CDMA   ORDERING(bts–sector–carrier)           0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5     (sec)––––––––––––––––––––  –––––––  – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –     ––––––  ––––––  –––––  ––––––  ––––––––  CARRIER–1–1–1         N     N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N       4       2       0      N       CUSTOM 10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures 10-32 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTShut Down Site Signaling Functions fora Packet BTSIf a complete site shutdown is required for the FRU replacement, followthe procedure in Table 10-8 to disable the packet BTS site.This site shut down procedure takes a BTS out–of–service(OOS), but does not affect the other BTSs. To minimizesystem impact, it may be advisable (but not necessary) toperform this procedure during a maintenance window.CAUTIONThe EDIT BTS REDIRECT or REDIRECT2 commanddoes NOT affect calls in progress and does NOT movethese calls to another BTS. The command prevents futurecalls from being originated on the targeted BTS and alsoredirects subscribers to another site/carrier. If active callprocessing is still taking place in the target BTS, wait forany active calls to terminate before locking/disabling theBTS resources.IMPORTANT*The SHUTDOWN command does NOT affect calls inprogress and does NOT move these calls to another BTS.Shutdown is a camp–on state, it prevents future calls frombeing originated on the targeted resource and waits for callsto terminate. When the resource becomes idle, it isautomatically transitioned to the locked/disabled state.Shutdown does not redirect subscribers to anothersite/carrier.Shutdown camp–on time is indefinite. Shutdown can beaborted at anytime by invoking the LOCK or DISABLEcommand.IMPORTANT*Refer to the System Commands Reference manual(68P09256A58) part/of Cellular System AdministrationCDMA2000 1X – 99R09255A10 CD–ROM for a completeexplanation of OMC–R commands.NOTE10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-33DRAFTTable 10-8: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnStep ActionAT THE OMC–R1Open a CLI window. Refer to the Accessing OMC–R CLI Window section on page 10-2.* IMPORTANTIt is recommended that you redirect subscribers to another site/carrier and then wait for any activecalls to terminate before locking/disabling the BTS.NOTESHUTDOWN and REDIRECT both prevent future calls from being originated on the targetedresource, but only SHUTDOWN waits indefinitely for the calls to terminate. When the resourcebecomes idle, SHUTDOWN automatically transitions the resource to the locked/disabled state.2If you are not concerned about redirecting subscribers and waiting for any active calls to terminateand you just want to lock/disable the BTS, perform step 13 and step 18 only.If you are not concerned about redirecting subscribers but you want to use SHUTDOWN and waitfor all active calls to terminate before locking/disabling the BTS, perform step 13, step 16 and step17.If you want to redirect subscribers and then wait for any active calls to terminate beforelocking/disabling the BTS, go to step 3.NOTEThe REDIRECT command is used to redirect subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site or to invoke theREDIRECT2 command which is then used to redirect subscribers to a different CDMA carrierfrequency. REDIRECT2 is the preferred command if an alternate CDMA carrier is available.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT BTS REDIRECT command when restoring signaling operationsat the end of the replacement procedure.3View the status of the BTS signaling redirect parameters for all carriers equipped for the BTS byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECTObserve the following typical system display response for a BTS (this example shows initialstandard values):                             Access Overload Class Redirect Flags                      RETURN                                       ROTATE  RECORD   EXP   IGNORE    SYS     CARRIER ID       IF FAIL  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1     TIMER    TYPE    SID    CDMA   ORDERING(bts–sector–carrier)           0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5     (sec)––––––––––––––––––––  –––––––  – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –     ––––––  ––––––  –––––  ––––––  ––––––––  CARRIER–146–1–1        N     N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N       4       1       0      N       CUSTOM . . . continued on next page10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-34 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-8: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the REDIRECT parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to bebroadcast on the paging channel redirects all subscribers away from the BTS and onto a differentBTS or system.4Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT!The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:<accolc0>enter Y, <accolc1>enter Y, ... <accolc15> enter Y (All Access Overload Classes must be set to yes to ensure that all subscribers are redirected.)<returniffail> , enter N(Must be set to no to ensure that subscribers do not return if redirect is unsuccessful.)<recordtype> , enter 1 or 2 (A value of 2 will invoke REDIRECT2 which is used to redirect subscribers to a CDMA channelat a neighbor site. A value of 1 redirects subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site. This example uses 2.)<expectedsid> , enter 13 (Use the Area ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system where they are beingredirected. This example uses 13. The valid range is 0 – 32767; the default is 0.)<ignorecdma> , enter Y<sysordering> , enter CUSTOM (The system acquisition ordering value tells the mobiles the order to use when attempting toobtain service on the different analog systems. Valid values are: CUSTOM – use custom systemselection; AONLY – try the A system only; BONLY – use the B system only; AFIRST – try the Asystem first. If unsuccessful, try the B system; BFIRST – try the B system first. If unsuccessful,try the A system; AORB – try A or B. If unsuccessful try the alternative system; CUSTOM is thedefault.)<rotatetimer> , enter 4 (Call processing continuously rotates, circular right–shifts, the Y/N values of Access OverloadClass Redirect Flags 0 to 9. Values are shifted one flag at the end of the timer period; then timerre–starts. Valid values are 0–255; 4 is the default.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).. . . continued on next page10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-35DRAFTTable 10-8: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnActionStep5View the status of the signaling REDIRECT parameters to verify that the applicable BTS is readyfor global redirect.omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECTEnsure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 4 (seeexample below).Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– –––– ––– ––––––––  CARRIER–146–1–1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 2 13 Y CUSTOM 6If 2 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 7.If 1 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 10.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT BTS REDIRECT2 command when restoring signalingoperations at the end of the replacement procedure.7View the status of the BTS signaling redirect parameters for all carriers equipped for the BTS byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT2Observe the following typical system display response for a BTS (this example shows initialstandard values):                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID     CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9    10    11    12    13    14   15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  –––––––––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––  CARRIER–146–1–1     65535  CDMA1900   –   –    –   –    –    –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     . . . continued on next page10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-36 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-8: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the REDIRECT2 parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to bebroadcast on the paging channel redirects all subscribers away from the BTS with the failedequipment and onto a CDMA channel at a neighbor site.8Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT2!The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:expecting an integer number (from 0 to 65535)<EXPNID= ? >(Use the Network ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system they are beingredirected to. This example uses 555.)expecting an integer number (from 0 to 2047)<CHAN1= ? >, <CHAN2= ? > ... <CHAN15= ?>(A list of CDMA channels for neighbor sites that the subscriber units can use for redirection. Thisexample uses 200, 350, 400, 725, 75, 175, 100, 575 and 950.)expecting an enumerated value:    CDMA1900    CDMA800     CDMA900     JAPANCDMA<BANDCLASS= ? >(Use CDMA1900 for 1.9 GHz systems, and CDMA800 for 800 MHz systems. This example usesCDMA1900.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).9View the status of the BTS signaling REDIRECT2 parameters to verify that the BTS is ready formaintenance.omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> REDIRECT2Ensure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 8 (seeexample below).                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID     CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9    10    11    12    13    14   15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  –––––––––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––  CARRIER–146–1–1      555    CDMA1900  200  350  400  725  75   175  100   575   950   –     –     –     –     –     –    . . . continued on next page10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-37DRAFTTable 10-8: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnActionStep10 View the existing congestion control parameters for all carriers equipped for the BTS by enteringthe following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for a BTS:        CARRIER                NEWCALL      REG        AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#)  SET  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ANALOGREDIRECT  GLOBALREDIRECT–––––––––––––––––––––––  –––  –––––––––  –––––––––  –––––––––  ––––––––––––––  ––––––––––––––        146–1–1           1    ENABLE     ENABLE     ENABLE        DISABLE         DISABLE      NOTEIn this step, you will change the value of the Global Service Redirection Flag(GLOBALREDIRECT) in the congestion control parameters so that the Global Service RedirectMessage is broadcast on all of the sector paging channels at the BTS.11 Enter the following command at the prompt using the applicable BTS number:omc–000000>EDIT BTS –<bts#> CONGESTCONF !The system prompts you to enter each control parameter value one at a time. Skip through theprompts until you get to the following:<globalredirect> , enter ENABLE (This will force the Global Service Redirect Message to be broadcast on all of the sector pagingchannels at the BTS.)The system displays the values of the control parameters. Verify that only theGLOBALREDIRECT value changed.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the change.Now the Global Service Redirection Message is sent over the sector paging channels. Allsubscribers are redirected away from the BTS and onto a different system or CDMA carrierchannel. This effectively shuts down the BTS.12 Verify that the CONGESTCONF globalredirect is enabled for each carrier at the BTS byentering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> CONGESTCONFObserve the following typical system display response for a BTS:        CARRIER                NEWCALL      REG        AGG(bts#–sector#–carrier#)  SET  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ALARMFLAG  ANALOGREDIRECT  GLOBALREDIRECT–––––––––––––––––––––––  –––  –––––––––  –––––––––  –––––––––  ––––––––––––––  ––––––––––––––        146–1–1           1    ENABLE     ENABLE     ENABLE        DISABLE         ENABLE     . . . continued on next page10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-38 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-8: Shut Down Site Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnActionStep13 Display the status of all devices at the BTS by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY BTS–<bts#> STATUSRecord the system response for all devices that are OOS_AUTOMATIC. This information will beused for later reference when restoring site signaling operations.NOTESHUTDOWN and REDIRECT both prevent future calls from being originated on the targetedresource, but only SHUTDOWN waits indefinitely for the calls to terminate. When the resourcebecomes idle, SHUTDOWN automatically transitions the resource to the locked/disabled state.14 If you redirected subscribers but do not want to use SHUTDOWN, go to step 15.If you redirected subscribers and want to use SHUTDOWN, go to step 16.15 Wait three minutes to allow any active calls to terminate then go to step 18.16 Shutdown all carriers equipped for the BTS by repeatedly entering the following command at theprompt:omc–000000>SHUTDOWN CARRIER–<bts#>–<sector#>–<carrier#>Repeat this command for each sector–carrier associated with each carrier.17 Observe that the system automatically returns a “Network Element State Change Event” messagefor each carrier being shutdown. This message shows the old and new states for the carrier. TheCARRIER will go from UNLOCKED/ENABLED/ACTIVE toSHUTTINGDOWN/ENABLED/ACTIVE to LOCKED/DISABLED/IDLE.When all BTS carriers shutdown in step 16 are reported as LOCKED/DISABLED/IDLE, the BTSwill be reported as UNLOCKED/ENABLED/IDLE.If you determine that it is taking too long for carriers to shutdown and the BTS to transition toUNLOCKED/ENABLED/IDLE state, perform step 18 to abort the shutdown process andLOCK/DISABLE the BTS.18 Lock/disable the BTS by entering either of the following commands at the prompt:omc–000000>DISABLE BTS–<bts#> UNComc–000000>LOCK BTS–<bts#> 10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-39DRAFTShut Down Sector Signaling Functionsfor a  Packet BTSIf a sector shutdown is required for the FRU replacement and the site iscurrently under CBSC control, follow the procedure in Table 10-9 todisable the sector at a packet BTS.This sector shut down procedure takes a sectorout–of–service (OOS), but does not affect the other sectors.To minimize system impact, it may be advisable (but notnecessary) to perform this procedure during a maintenancewindow.CAUTIONThe EDIT SECTOR REDIRECT or REDIRECT2command does NOT affect calls in progress and does NOTmove these calls to another sector/carrier. The commandonly prevents future calls from being originated on thetargeted sector/carrier. If active call processing is stilltaking place in the target sector/carrier, wait for any activecalls to terminate before disabling the sector/carrier.IMPORTANT*The SHUTDOWN command does NOT affect calls inprogress and does NOT move these calls to another BTS.Shutdown is a camp–on state, it prevents future calls frombeing originated on the targeted resource and waits for callsto terminate. When the resource becomes idle, it isautomatically transitioned to the locked/disabled state.Shutdown does not redirect subscribers to anothersite/carrier.Shutdown camp–on time is indefinite. Shutdown can beaborted at anytime by invoking the LOCK or DISABLEcommand.IMPORTANT*Refer to the System Commands Reference manual(68P09256A58) part/of Cellular System AdministrationCDMA2000 1X – 99R09255A10 CD–ROM for a completeexplanation of OMC–R commands.NOTE10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-40 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-9: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnStep ActionAT THE OMC–R1Open a CLI window. Refer to the Accessing OMC–R CLI Window section on page 10-2.* IMPORTANTIt is recommended that you redirect subscribers to another sector/carrier and then wait for anyactive calls to terminate before locking/disabling the sector/carrier.NOTESHUTDOWN and REDIRECT both prevent future calls from being originated on the targetedresource, but only SHUTDOWN waits indefinitely for the calls to terminate. When the resourcebecomes idle, SHUTDOWN automatically transitions the resource to the locked/disabled state.2If you are not concerned about redirecting subscribers and waiting for any active calls to terminateand you just want to lock/disable the sector/carrier, perform step 13 and step 18 only.If you are not concerned about redirecting subscribers but you want to use SHUTDOWN and waitfor all active calls to terminate before locking/disabling the sector/carrier, perform step 13, step 16and step 17.If you want to redirect subscribers and then wait for any active calls to terminate beforelocking/disabling the sector/carrier, go to step 3.NOTEThe REDIRECT command is used to redirect subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site or to invoke theREDIRECT2 command which is then used to redirect subscribers to a different CDMA carrierfrequency. REDIRECT2 is the preferred command if an alternate CDMA carrier is available.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT SECTOR REDIRECT command when restoring signalingoperations at the end of the replacement procedure.3View the status of the sector signaling redirect parameters for all carriers equipped for the sectorby entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECTObserve the following typical system display response for sector 1 (this example shows initialstandard values):Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– ––– –––– –––––––CARRIER–1–2–1 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 4 1 0 N CUSTOM. . . continued on next page10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continuedJun 2004 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU  10-41DRAFTTable 10-9: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnActionStepNOTEThis step edits the REDIRECT parameters so that the Global Service Redirect Message to bebroadcast on the paging channel redirects all subscribers away from the sector with the failedequipment and onto a different sector, BTS, or system.4Enter the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>EDIT SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECT !The system prompts you to enter each command parameter value one at a time. Answer theprompts in the following order:<accolc0>enter Y, <accolc1>enter Y,... <accolc15>enter Y(All Access Overload Classes must be set to yes to ensure that all subscribers are redirected.)<returniffail> , enter N(Must be set to no to ensure that subscribers do not return if redirect is unsuccessful.)<recordtype> , enter 1 or 2 (A value of 2 will invoke REDIRECT2 which is used to redirect subscribers to a CDMA channelat a neighbor sector/site. A value of 1 redirects subscribers to an 1.9 GHz site. This example uses2.)<expectedsid> , enter 13 (Use the Area ID the subscriber units should expect to find on the system where they are beingredirected. This example uses 13. The valid range is 0 – 32767; the default is 0.)<ignorecdma> , enter Y<sysordering> , enter CUSTOM (The system acquisition ordering value tells the mobiles the order to use when attempting toobtain service on the different analog systems. Valid values are: CUSTOM – use custom systemselection; AONLY – try the A system only; BONLY – use the B system only; AFIRST – try the Asystem first. If unsuccessful, try the B system; BFIRST – try the B system first. If unsuccessful,try the A system; AORB – try A or B. If unsuccessful try the alternative system; CUSTOM is thedefault.)<rotatetimer> , enter 4 (Call processing continuously rotates, circular right–shifts, the Y/N values of Access OverloadClass Redirect Flags 0 to 9. Values are shifted one flag at the end of the timer period; then timerre–starts. Valid values are 0–255; 4 is the default.)The system displays the command to be sent. Verify the command syntax.omc–000000>Accept [yes/no]?Enter Y to accept the command or N to go back and enter the correct value(s).. . . continued on next page10
Packet BTS Shut Down Procedures  – continued 10-42 1X SC480 BTS Hardware Installation, Optimization/ATP, and FRU Jun 2004DRAFTTable 10-9: Shut Down Sector Signaling Functions Procedure For a Packet BTSnActionStep5View the status of the sector signaling REDIRECT parameters to verify that the applicable sectoris ready for global redirect.omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECTEnsure that the values in the system display response match the values input in Step 4 (seeexample below).Access Overload Class Redirect Flags ROTATECARRIER ID RETURN 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 TIMER RECORD EXP IGNORE SYS(bts–sector–carrier) IF FAIL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 (SEC) TYPE SID CDMA ORDERING–––––––––––––––––––– ––––––– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ––––– –––– –––– ––– ––––––––CARRIER–1–2–1 N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 4 2 13 Y CUSTOM6If 2 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 7.If 1 was entered for <recordtype> in step 4, go to step 10.* IMPORTANTRecord the values shown in the following system display response. These values are used toanswer the prompts for the EDIT SECTOR REDIRECT2 command when restoring signalingoperations at the end of the replacement procedure.7View the status of the sector signaling REDIRECT2 parameters for all carriers equipped for thesector by entering the following command at the prompt:omc–000000>DISPLAY SECTOR–<bts#>–<sector#> REDIRECT2Observe the following typical system display response for sector 1 (this example shows initialstandard values):                                                       REDIRECT CHAN     CARRIER ID         EXP      BAND(bts–sector–carrier)   NID     CLASS    1    2    3    4    5    6     7     8     9    10    11    12    13    14   15––––––––––––––––––––  –––––  –––––––––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  –––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  ––––  –––  ––––  CARRIER–146–2–1     65535  CDMA1900   –   –    –   –    –    –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –     . . . continued on next page10

Navigation menu